Home
        Lexmark C52x, C53x (5022-xxx)
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                           JFAN1  1 1   rez r zZ 5 r    JOPP1 JPH1 J1  F wu or Q roz Q    Q OM 3 0  gt     gt  L  Aol   rO   5 g  OC o e    gt  OO HooooooooO A O O  GOIJLVPS1 Pooouo0dooo4 O  Ir  OOOOOOOOOL    Ao EV  F4 OO booosocogd          EIFS ef mf ff a    O PoU BETH N   JucarTt  42  J1 IE      Joe     g     STRANS1         J800 l  i   JUSB1                                  CO rara  6  O O   ee O o                i      JCART2 o2 22 E    J31  sour 2    z A  F  HOO   Bali tio            JTRAY 1                              JDC2                                                                                              z         JTRANS2 1e   ae oo  1 oo oo  oo  oo  oo  oo  AA oo  S oo    IJOPT1  rat oo  1 oo S  oo J5  oo  oo  o  oo  y  oo 1    JBUMP1 Ok     oa Jd ddI ISI ISIS ISIS III IIS IS II II54   i ai oS ee cP  1    oo 119971991999191919911971197111111111  oo     0  7 a  0     5 18 Service Manual    Connector listing   models C53x   see    System card  network    models C53x    on page 5 18     Connector     am         V FHUSB_ 5  JB_USB_RD   JB_USB_ RD   Ground   Ground   V_BF   5 SW   S_BIN_FB  Ground  VS_BUMP_LED  S BUMP_ENC  Ground  V_BUMP_M   V_BUMP_M   CART1_HALL_U  CART2_HALL_U  Ground    JBIN1    JBUMP1    JCART1    V_CART1_WIND_V  CART2_HAL
2.                                                                                                                                                VS_TRAY_ 5V_NMT O O  o0   S_TRAY_INPUT O O O 1  VS_TRAY_INPT_LED  5V  00 00  aoo o       T   Thermistor AY_PICK_M  O SS O o a  PHOTO_TRAN Transparency Motor METRY FICK IM  Q 00 Q 00 h J31    PHOTO_LED 6     Input Asm  GND  gt  2 ae  T   12C_DATA i flag sensor S  TRAY_ENC 00 D oo a    z 7  8 VS_TRAY_ENC_LED 00 oo  12C_CLK BiG sensor   t t oo oo Network  GND a  Autoconnect APUL ay O O  45V   ao   i O connection  L  12C_DATA_TB VS_JTRANS 1   3 3V  O O          Transport card 12C_CLK_TB  TPS_SNS_RIN TRANS_THERM_SNS  TPS_SNS TPS_PWM1     Tfee  TPS ar VS_5V_TPS VS_JTRANS 9   3 3V  oe   5V 51    Autoconnect       12C_DATA SI OPT_PCTL o o    9   1 2 et oo  i sH OPT_PSIZE ae  i al 33 System board  Thermistor oo  A OPT_TYPE oo YS e oar          Autoconnect foils   6  4  2  A SERIAL_TRANSMIT oe d5  TPS Out PR 500 Sheet option ENEE mee   3 3V a  22  PLEV     33  LED On l O oo          JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ1 J J J    E   1111111111111111 111111111111111                    5V Rtn  a HOSTS eS 141S 1211  aper level sensor  P PEELE EC     ES     Transport CPU    aae           B           SED A Bump align  A Motor 5 500 Sheet option card motor                                           
3.                                                               5V Cc  ne OPT_PLEV OPT_PCTL _ 5 6  120 CIK OPT_PSIZE oO  z    0    Thermistor O VPE JOPT1   Q    7S can Autoconnect  rosaa SEG  TPS Out 500 Sheet option EEE Ea AIS  3 3V Por V_BUMP_M Sy O OQ  T   ev am O O VBUMP Me stem board z   tolelsi7lelsi4isielh  CND JBUMP1      Paper level sensor S_BUMP_ENC  propo st7 s s 4 3 2 1            7  1  0  VS_BUMP_LED    i   O   oe OL        gt   O  A       O O  O O      TED A   Bump align  a Motor 6 500 Sheet option card motor     24V  Typ    Ple  Psize   24V_Rtn    Transport CPU        5V_Rtn                                                                      Lexmark C53X  5022                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              24V 
4.                                     MPF pick tire    Diagnostic aids 3 33    5022 xxx    Once the paper is fed onto the transfer belt  the photoconductor drums in conjunction with the transfer belt pull  the print media through the paper path     Photoconductor  drums    Transfer belt       3 34 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Once the print media exits the transfer belt  it enters the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to bond the  toner permanently to the media  The fuser rollers continue to turn and pull the print media through the paper  path until it reaches the exit drive roll  The exit drive roll pulls the print media from the fuser rollers and delivers it  to the fuser output drive roll  Once the print media reaches the fuser output drive roll  the roller pushes the print  media into the output bin     Fuser output Fuser exit drive roll  drive roll       Paper exit flag Fuser backup roll          Fuser exit  idler roll    Fuser hot roll    Diagnostic aids 3 35    5022 xxx    If the page is to be duplexed  the fuser output drive roll continues to pull the media until it clears the paper exit  flag and then reverses the rotation of the roller in order to pull the media back into the printer duplex assembly   The media is then routed down through the duplex path until it reaches the bump aligner roll  Once in this  position  it enters the EP path for the second time     Fuser output  drive roll    Paper exit flag       The paper exit flag serves two purposes  When i
5.                                   7 3  Operator panel assembly  C534n C534dn                                              7 3  Bezel  C532N      558 eee nee ee Re Re Se SS eR ee Re ee 7 3  Bezel  CSS2dn            lt 2 ee rere re ee er rr re re rere teense 7 3  Bezel C534n                               eee eee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 7 3  Bezel  C534dn                2 ee ere ee ee er re rnnr 7 3  Paniheddacsemply Cook Ue ee 7 9  Front door assembly  C532n C534n                                7    7   7 7        7 5  Duplex front door assembly  C530dn C532dn C534dn                        rrr rrr errr ee 7 5  Front door parts packet  C53x            2 2 creer ret re rr et ee ener eee 7 5  PxXifilay COVE COJ Sao Ses eo es eee SaaS es eee eee eee Seas Peas 7 3  Tray assembly  550 sheet  C532n C532dn C534n C534dn                                 7 15  Paper tray assembly  single feeder  C532  C534n                               rere ree eee 7 15  system card support shield  C53x              22 e enter re ree rr eee reece eee 7 9  Pane Pace  Cook See ress ase a a ese ane oe eee ee eee ee ae See aa 7 5  Parts packet  cables  C53X              rs ee reer re re rt re rt ee re erence eee  7 19  MPF paper tray assembly  250 sheet  C530dn C532dn C534dn                             7 15  Option tray assembly  550 sheet option  includes tray   C532n C532dn C534n C534dn              7 15  Bin full sensor with cable  C53xX             28sec m ester n cee eee et eee es 7 3  Front access do
6.                 7 5  EP drive assembly  C52x                                           eee    eee      7 7  Smart chip card  052x only                                       7 77  77 77        7 9  High voltage power supply  052x                                          7    7       7 11  Top access cover assembly  non network   0524                                         7 3  Front access door cover assembly  non duplex   C520n C522n C524  C524n                     7 3  Operator panel assembly  C52x                                    7   77  77 77        7 3  Outer DEZE seSeS ese feet a ee er ee a ee eee ea eee 7 3  Toner level sensor               2c rrr rt tr rr et rr er ne reer cere eeee 7 11  Printhead assembly  C52x              22 cece cree re re eee rt eee ce ee  7 9  Front door assembly  C520n C522n C524n                  2  r rr reer rr rr rrr rere 7 5  Duplex font Weer assembly  Co240n     S oes2 ceseeer ses een ee tee oS ere ets ere mee eae 7 5  Front door parts packet  C52x             2s rere e te rr er re tt eet eee e eee 7 5  Pxililay COVO Coe  6 Sree e Serer seer se eee See ee Seg See eee Se eRe eae 7 3  Tray assembly  500 sheet  C522n C524 C524n C524dn                                     7 15  Paper tray assembly  single feeder  C520n C522n                       2  rr rrr errr ree ee 7 15  Right cover                              reer rr re ee ee ee ee eee eee 7 3  Eides a a Ba 7 3  Rear cover       2 ne ee em ee RR ee RR ee eee ee 7 3  Transier contact asse
7.            Service Manual    Lexmark    C520  C522  C524  C530  C532  C534    5022 XXX    e Table of Contents    e Start Diagnostics    e Safety and Notices    e Trademarks    e Index       5022 xxx    1  General information    The Lexmark    C52x and C53x color laser printers deliver superior text and brilliant graphics  The following  models are available     Lexmark C534dn dtn Duplex  network  550 sheet tray        Maintenance approach    The diagnostic information in this manual leads you to the correct field replaceable unit  FRU  or part  Use the  error code charts  symptom tables  and service checks to determine the symptom and repair the failure  You  may find that the removals in the Repair information chapter will help you identify parts  After you complete the  repair  perform tests as needed to verify the repair  Begin at    Start    on page 2 1     Options and features    The following options or features are available  Some options are not available in every country  Contact your  point of purchase for options available in your country     Memory options of 128MB  256MB  and 512MB SDRAM  Flash memory options of 32MB and 64MB  Hard disk   40GB with adapter  models C524  C524n  and C524dn and models C534n  C534dn  and  C534dtn   Media handling operations      500 sheet optional tray assembly for models C522n  C524  C524n  and C524dn and 550 sheet  optional tray assembly for models C532n  C532dn  C534n  and C534dn       Duplex   not an option  available only on mod
8.         4 62 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Disconnect the five connectors  C  from the HVPS                    C    Installation notes  Be sure to replace the spring when replacing the HVPS  See the illustration for proper  orientation        Wy  YYYYYY                 Repair information 4 63    5022 xxx    Left bellcrank removal    See    Left bellcrank assembly    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the left cover  See    Left cover removal    on page 4 20   2  Remove the C clip  A         g t A    A    3  Remove the left bellcrank     4 64 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Low voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    See    Low voltage power supply  115 230 V    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the right side cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   2  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25   3  Unplug the JLVPS1 connector  A  from the system card              4  Remove the five LVPS mounting screws  B    5  Disconnect the cable from the LVPS  C      JF ia       6  Remove the cable from the cable guide  and remove the LVPS     Repair information 4 65    5022 xxx    Installation note  When installing the new LVPS  make sure the voltage switch  D  is set for the proper  value  115 V or 230 V   depending on the country        4 66 Service Manual    5022 xxx  Multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm assembly removal   models C52x only    See    MPF swing arm assembly  C52x    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Open the to
9.        4 92 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Waste toner assembly removal    Not a FRU     1  Press release latch  A    2  Swing front of waste toner away from printer and remove        Repair information 4 93    5022 xxx    4 94 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Locations and connectors    Locations    Covers  Outer bezel  C52X     Bezel  C53X         Inner bezel  C52X     Operator Panel   C52X     Exit tray  cover Rear    Top access cover  assembly    Front access cover    Paper tray dust cover   with spring     Locations and connectors 5 1    5022 xxx    Front       Fuser cable cover          Paper pick  mechanism  assembly    MPF swing arm  assembly  models              C52X only   Front door  assembly Deflector  assembly a  a Bellcrank   amp  assembly    Printer  pad  Bump  aligner gears  Front Pare ail      cap TON  Right front door  Left front door     assembly restraint  assembly restraint cable  cable    5 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Right         EP drive  assembly          _    Bump aligner  motor    5 V interlock switch    Locations and connectors 5 3    5022 xxx    Rear       Printhead assembly    Smart chip card   C52x only     System card  support shield    an    System card    1 aS   ae    5 4 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Left             Toner level  sensor  High voltage    power supply Transfer contact assembly    Locations and connectors 5 5    5022 xxx    Top    Top cover camshaft  assembly       Top access door  24V interlock switch  with cable        5 
10.       Print Resolution  Set to 1200 dpi  print quality problems should be checked at different resolution  settings        Toner Darkness  Set to 4  default        Color Saver  Set to OFF       RGB Brightness  RGB Contrast  RGB Saturation  Set to 0       Color Balance  Select Reset Defaults to zero out all colors       Check the paper type  texture and weight settings against what is loaded in the printer   Once the printer has been restored to its default levels  do the following   Inspect the transfer belt for damage  Replace if damaged   Inspect the OPCs and toner cartridges for damage  Replace if damaged   If paper other than 20lb plain letter A4 paper is being used  load 20lb plain letter A4 and print the Print  Quality pages to see if the problem remains   Use Tray 1 to test print quality problems   Print the Print Quality Pages  and looked for variations in the print from what is expected     N eS    An incorrect printer driver for the installed software can cause problems  Incorrect characters could print  and the  copy may not fit the page correctly     Measure all voltages from the connector to the printer ground   Print quality   background    Service tip  Some background problems can be caused by rough papers  non Lexmark toner cartridges or if the  media texture is set to the rough setting     Some slick or coated papers may also cause background problems  Some problems occur with printers that run  a large amount of graphics in a humid environment       Step Que
11.      An error has occurred in the fuser     Tray 1 motor has failed     Fuser motor has failed     EP Drive assembly cartridge 1 motor  has failed     EP Drive assembly cartridge 2   bottom  motor has failed     Bump aligner motor has failed     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     110 xx   Mirror motor service check    on  page 2 27     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     111 xx  112 xx  113 xx  and 114 xx   Printhead  error service check    on page 2 27     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     111 xx  112 xx  113 xx  and 114 xx   Printhead  error service check    on page 2 27     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     111 xx  112 xx  113 xx  and 114 xx   Printhead  error service check    on page 2 27     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     111 xx  112 xx  113 xx  and 114 xx   Printhead  error service check    on page 2 27     Remove and reseat the fuser  POR the printer  If the  error message persists  see    120 01  120 02   120 08   120 10  120 13   120 15    Fuser error  service check    on page 2 28     Remove and reseat the fuser  POR the printer  If the  error message persists  see    120 03   Fuser error  service check    on page 2 30     Remove and reseat the fuser  POR the printer   Check the camshaft follower on the left side  If the  error message persists  see    120 04   120 07     Fuser error service check    on page 2 30     Remove and reseat the fuser  POR the prin
12.      Diagnostic information 2 13       5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     orem  Omen    242 05    242 21    250 03  250 04    2 14 Service Manual    While feeding from tray 2  the input  sensor is not made     The tray 2 autocomp or the redrive  motor stalled     While feeding from the MPF  the input  sensor did not break     While feeding from the MPF  the input  sensor is made while the previous  page is still in the aligner        Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan media  and stack it flat in the 500 sheet tray   tray 2      Properly set media restraints in tray 2     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  to    147 xx  149 xx   Motor  500 sheet 550   sheet option tray 2 motor  error service  check    on page 2 37     Fan media  and stack it flat in the 500 sheet tray   tray 2     If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  to    147 xx  149 xx   Motor  500 sheet 550   sheet option tray 2 motor  error service  check    on page 2 37     Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in the paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Replace the paper tray     Replace the MPF swing arm assembly  See     Multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm  assembly removal   models C52x only    on  page 4 67     If the previous actio
13.     925 01 Fan Error Fan has stalled  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     925 01   Fan error service check    on page 2 47    945 01 Transfer Roll Yellow transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see       945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     945 02 Transfer Roll Cyan transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48        2 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     frre  oweney ma    945 03 Transfer Roll Magenta transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     945 04 Transfer Roll Black transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     946 01 Transfer Roll Yellow transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     946 02 Transfer Roll Cyan transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     946 03 Transfer Roll Magenta transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists
14.     Installation note  Be sure the tab  B  is fully engaged        Repair information 4 27    5022 xxx    Top access cover assembly removal   model C52x only    See    Top access cover assembly  network   C520n C522n C524n C524dn    on page 7 3 or    Top access  cover assembly  non network   C524    on page 7 3 for the part number     Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60    Remove the four screws  A  exposed after removing the fuser     MANT       5  Remove the operator panel  See    Operator panel assembly removal    on page 4 23   6  Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15     4 28 Service Manual    5022 xxx    7  Remove the screw  B  exposed after removing the exit tray        8  If the top access door is open  close it   Warning  Ensure that the top access door is closed before removing the linkage screw  Failing to close the    door leaves the linkage under a load  which may result in the linkage screw being catapulted away from the  printer when removed     Repair information 4 29    5022 xxx    9  Remove the linkage screw  C         4 30 Service Manual    5022 xxx    10  Remove the screw  D  from the rear           D    11  Disconnect the cables for the fan at JFAN1  E   the operator panel at JOPP1  F   the high voltage power  supply connector at JHVPS1  G   and the bin full
15.     Select Left Margin  and press Select     2  Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page     3        Engine XX XX XXXX X Magenta Left Margin  x T    Font X XXXXX XX X Magenta Right Margin  x  Magent Skew  x       magenta Bow  x  Dup Top Margin  x    Paper Source   Tray 1                 Formatted Size   XXXXXX        t    5S    e Pressing the left arrow decreases the value and moves the left alignment marks to the left   e Pressing the right arrow increases the value and moves the left alignment marks to the right   Press Select   Y    to save the value           4  Print the Quick Test page  and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied     Right Margin    1     Select Right Margin  and press Select     Engine XX XX XXXX X Magenta Left Margin  x T    Font X XXXXX XX X Magenta Right Margin  x  Magent Skew  x  magenta Bow  x  Dup Top Margin  X          Paper Source   Tray 1  Formatted Size   XXXXXX             A    Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page   e Pressing the left arrow decreases the value and moves the right alignment marks to the right   e Pressing the right arrow increases the value and moves the right alignment marks to the left   Press Select   Y    to save the value   Print the Quick Test page  and check the results  Repeat if necessary   When the registration is complete  proceed to the color alignments     Alignment  cyan  ye
16.     on page 4 23     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Check the operator panel assembly cable   Is the cable damaged     Measure the voltage between JOPP1 pin 2  and ground on the system card     Is the voltage approximately  5 V dc     2 54 Service Manual    Operator panel display all diamonds  five beeps       Replace the top access  cover assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Go to step 2     Replace the operator panel  assembly  See    Operator  panel assembly removal     on page 4 23     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     5022 xxx    Print quality service check    Note  This symptom may require replacement of one or more CRUs  Customer Replaceable Units  designated  as supplies or maintenance items  which are the responsibility of the customer  With the customer s permission   you may need to install a developer  toner  cartridge or photoconductor unit     Service tip  Before troubleshooting any print quality problems  do the following     1  Print a menu settings page  and check the life status of all supplies  Any supplies that are low should be  replaced   Note  Be sure and keep the original menu page to restore the customer s custom settings if needed   2  Onthe menu page  make sure the following is set to the default level       Color Correction  Set to Auto 
17.    e The developer roll located in the toner cartridge   e The doctor blade located in the toner cartridge   e The four transfer rolls located in the transfer belt    Printhead assembly    The printhead receives control and image data from the system card  RIP   Through the use of a laser unit  the  printhead irradiates the photoconductor drum with light and creates an invisible image called a latent or  electrostatic image     Photoconductor unit    The photoconductor unit consists primarily of a charge roll and the photoconductor drum  The charge roll  charges the surface of the photoconductor drum to prepare it for the latent image    drawn    by the laser  Once the  photoconductor drum has been written to by the laser  it is responsible for picking up toner from the cartridge  developer roller and then transferring the image to the print media     Toner cartridge    This unit consists primarily of the developer roll and the toner adder roll  The primary function of this unit is to  supply charge toner to the photoconductor unit for transfer onto the print media  The toner adheres to the  electrostatic image on the surface of the photoconductor drum which is then transferred to the print media     Fuser    The fuser assembly uses heat and pressure to fuse the toner image onto the print media     Diagnostic aids 3 45    5022 xxx    Charging    The primary component of the charging process is the high voltage power supply  The following provides  information that covers the 
18.    to save the value   Print the Quick Test page  and check the results  Repeat if necessary   When the registration is complete  proceed to the color alignments     Alignment  cyan  yellow  and magenta     1       ey    Press Back      on the operator panel until you reach the top menu  select ALIGNMENT MENU  and  press Select    Select Cyan    Select Top Margin  and use the right and left arrow keys to select zero  Press Select    y   to save the  setting    Select Left Margin  Right Margin  Bottom Margin  Skew  and Bow  In each menu  use the right and left  arrow keys to select zero  and press Select   y   to save the value    lt is important to set all the values to zero before starting     4 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Select Quick Test in the Cyan menu  and press Select   Two pages print  You may have to print these pages several times until you get T and Z aligned  Do not go  to step 2 until T and Z are aligned  The first page is similar to the following     Cyan Alignment  Step 1    t ii     B0  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80  80  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80    Top  T  Coarse Adjustment Skew  Z  Coarse Adjustment    Top  T  Fine Adjustment Skew  Z  Fine Adjustment    nN  o        20      18         16            14         12         10         O 0    gt     d  onego            IN    bhahCnNaa    a Z Qe_    i   P  Current New Current New    Cyan Cyan Cyan Cyan  T value T value Z value Z value    STEP 1  Adjust the Top  T  margin and Skew  Z  then confirm before going to
19.   24V  24V    EAEE EE EEEE on  LVPS_ZERO_XING  24V 8 OO OO   5V  5V    Transport      E JF  motor V_C1V 6  EI  V_JC1 3 6  E JFs             Duplex Assembly  Duplex  M  A  driver    card          Enan          Encoder       Cartridge drive  motor 2          00                                        8   6                    DUPLEX_ENC  DUPLEX_PWM  VS_DUPLX  5V              ENnaSag                         NC   GND  TRAY_NMT  3 3V   VS_TRAY_ 5V_NMT  GND                                                           ebleh                                                                                                                                                                                                                                S_TRAY_INPUT fe  fe  Cc  VS_TRAY_INPT_LED  5V  l A 1 a O x     o0 So Q O  Thermistor oo oo oO  PHOTO_TRAN Transparency D 00    80 J31 D E  PHOTO_LED Input Sensor GND oo QO 90 Ce  12C_DATA fla TRAY _ENC Q O   Q ao Zo  72C_CLK g   V_ENC_LED 5 o0   ie e  r sensor nput tra ae 20 1  GND Autoconnect p y JTRAY2 o as aE     TPS_THERM_SNS N C O B O O  TPS_GAIN_ADJ TPS_SNS_RTN 6 F O Jt17  7    VS_JTRANS 9   3 3V  TPS_SNS O O  an i TRANS_THERM_SNS VS_5V_TPS          a sport ca VS_JTRANS 5  5V_SW  Trans_Belt_Sns JTRANS1        12C_CLK_TB  VS_JTRANS 1   5V     12C_DATA_TB                                TPS       Autoconnect                                                                                                                                             
20.   Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card        Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        2 46 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Models C53x only    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the JTRANS1 Go to step 2   Check the connector JTRANS1 for proper cable    connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage  See    Connector listing      models C53x    on page 5 19 for the location   of the JTRANS1 connector     Is the cable damaged     Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48 or removal    on page 4 79      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly   removal   model C53x only    on page 4 51     Does the error clear        925 01   Fan error service check    Replace the top access cover assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Top access cover assembly removal    See    System card    model C52x only    on page 4 28 or    Top removal    on page 4 79   access cover assembly removal   model  C53x only    on page 4 32     Does the error clear        Diagnostic information 2 47    5022 xxx    945 XX  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear 
21.   Select Supplies Menu  and press       Press    to select Replace Supply    Select Cyan PC Unit  Magenta PC Unit  Yellow PC Unit  or Black PC Unit based on the  photoconductor unit that was just replaced  and then press        lt color gt  PC Unit Replaced displays    Press    to select Yes     4 70 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Pick roll rubber tires removal and replacement    See    Pick arm roll    on page 7 15 for the part number     The autocompensator pick roll tires are located in the base printer  There are also tires in all input options  If you  have additional input options  and you are having problems with media picking  replace these tires also  Always  replace the pick tires in pairs  The tires come in a package of two        Warning  Remove only the rubber tires and not the pick tire assembly to avoid losing small parts     1  Remove the paper tray   2  Pull the autocompensator pick arm  A  down        Repair information 4 71    5022 xxx    3  Remove the rubber tire  B  from the pick roll assembly  C   Repeat for the other pick roll assembly        ome  B C B    Installation notes  Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture  D  turning in the direction as shown     Note  Feel the rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown                    4 72 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Printer pad removal    See    Printer pad  included in parts packet   screws  P N 40X1431     on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Slide the corner of t
22.   Selections include Auto  MP Feeder  and Manual Paper  MP Feeder is only available on some printer models     Note  If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual  a power on reset is performed  and the value of the  Paper Prompts menu item before the power on reset was MP Feeder  then when the printer restarts  the printer  automatically changes the Paper Prompts setting to Manual Paper     Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Env prompts that  are set to Manual  Manual Paper  or Manual Env     3 24 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Env Prompts    Controls the source the printer selects for a change envelope source message  The printer displays the change  envelope message based on the size of the envelope requested and not by the envelope type     Selections include Auto  MP Feeder  and Manual Env  MP Feeder is only available on some printer models     Note  If the Configure MP setting is changed to Manual  and a power on reset is performed  and the value of the  Env Prompts menu item before the power on reset was MP Feeder  then when the printer restarts  the printer  automatically changes the Env Prompt setting to Manual Env     Load Manual overrides that would result in a change paper message are disabled for Paper or Env prompts that  are set to Manual  Manual Paper  or Manual Env     Jobs on Disk    Lets the user select whether or not the printer deletes all buffered jobs on the hard disk  This menu item only  appea
23.   Using media    Using letterhead    Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the chosen preprinted letterhead is acceptable for  laser printers     Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead  Use the following table for help when loading  letterhead     Process or paper source Printside Top of page  Tray 1 Letterhead faceup Letterhead goes toward the front of the tray  Tray 2 Letterhead faceup Letterhead goes toward the front of the tray    Duplex  two sided  printing from Letterhead facedown Letterhead goes toward the rear of the tray  trays 1 and 2    Multipurpose feeder Letterhead facedown Letterhead top edge enters first  Manual feeder Letterhead facedown Letterhead top edge enters first    Duplex  two sided  printing from Letterhead faceup Letterhead top edge enters last  the multipurpose feeder    Using transparencies       Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities   When printing on transparencies     e From MarkVision    Professional  the printer software  or the control panel  set the Paper Type to  Transparency    e Feed transparencies from the standard tray  Tray 1  or the multipurpose feeder    e Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers  Check with the manufacturer or vendor to  ensure transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 180  C  856   F  without melting   discoloring  offsetting  or releasing hazardous emissions    e Use transparencies that ar
24.   Wiring diagrams    Wiring diagrams are attached to the end of this document  Diagrams are designed for 11 x 17 in  or A3 paper   Print the individual wiring diagram pages separately on larger paper for best effect     Locations and connectors 5 23    5022 xxx    5 24 Service Manual    5022 xxx    6  Preventive maintenance    Scheduled maintenance    The operator panel displays 80 Replace Fuser at 120K page count interval  The fuser assembly and the transfer  roll should be changed at this interval to maintain the print quality and reliability of the printer  The following  maintenance items are available for the customer     Maintenance items    Fuser assembly  115 V 40X3569  Fuser assembly  230 V 40X3570    Fuser assembly  100 V 40X3571  Transfer belt assembly  C52x 40X1401  Transfer belt assembly  C53x 40X3572       Preventive maintenance 6 1    5022 xxx    6 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    7  Parts catalog    How to use this parts catalog    The following legend is used in the parts catalog     Asm  Part f Units  o   Index Units mach Description    e Asm index  identifies the assembly and the item in the diagram  For example  3 1 indicates Assembly 3  and the item number 1    e Part number  identifies the unique number that identifies this FRU    e Units mach  refers to the number of units actually used in the base printer or product    e Units FRU  refers to the number of units packaged together and identified by the part number    e NS   Not shown  in the Asm Index col
25.   and remove the 5 V interlock switch     4 54 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Front door assembly removal    See the part number for the Front door assembly for the specific model you need on page 7 5     1  Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16    2  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    3  For C52x only  Disconnect the JTRANS1 cable  A  from the system card   For C53x only  Disconnect the JTRANS2 cable  A  from the system card   Note  If you have a duplex model  also disconnect the JDOUPLX1 cable  B  from the system card     Pa   i  JT       Repair information 4 55    5022 xxx    4  Models C52x only  Disconnect the cable  C  from the right side of the frame  Be careful not to lose the  grounding clip  D      Ye ee       A             es        5  Remove the gearbox shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   6  Close the front door assembly   7  Release the left and right front door assembly cable restraint springs  E  from the front door assembly       oa       8  Open the front door assembly     4 56 Service Manual    5022 xxx    9  Unwrap and remove the cable from the left and right pulleys  F      L p         Pa    Z      sen 7y  vy       Repair information 4 57    5022 xxx    11  Open the front door assembly  slide it to the right  and remove  You need to press firmly to slide the front  door assembly to the right        Installation note  See    Front door assem
26.   continue printing     If printing continues  order a replacement waste toner box immediately     If the problem persists  open the front access door and check the bump aligner shaft for  binding  Clear the binding if possible  If not possible  contact your next level of service     Replace the waste toner box using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement  waste toner box     Ensure that there is no interference between the waste toner box and the printer     If the problem persists  open the front access door and check the bump aligner shaft for  binding  Clear the binding if possible     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     If the problem persists  contact your next level of service        Diagnostic information 2 23    5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     82 Waste toner box  missing    83 Transfer belt missing    83 Transfer belt life  warning    83 Replace transfer belt    84  lt color gt  PC Unit life  warning    84 Replace  lt color gt  PC  Unit    2 24 Service Manual       Insert the waste toner box     Inspect the top cover camshaft assembly for proper operation  When the top access cover  is closed  the printer should mechanically interlock     Check the JBUMP1 connection cable connected to the system card for defects and  proper connection  If the cable wiring or the cable connection is defective  replace the  bump aligner motor  See    Bump aligner motor removal   
27.   magnetic   2 Phillips screwdriver  magnetic short blade  Needlenose pliers   Diagonal side cutters   Spring hook   Feeler gauges   Analog or digital multimeter  Parallel wrap plug 1819128  Twinax serial debug cable 1381963  Coax serial debug cable 1381964    General information 1 13    Acronyms    C   CRU  DIMM  DRAM  EP  EPROM  ESD  FRU   GB  HVPS    LASER  LCD  LED  LVPS    MPF  MS  NVRAM  OPT  PC   pel  POR  POST  PWM  RIP  SDRAM  SIMM  SRAM  TAR  Vac   V dc    1 14 Service Manual    Cyan   Customer Replaceable Unit   Dual Inline Memory Module   Dynamic Random Access Memory  ElectroPhotographic  process   Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory  Electrostatic Discharge   Field Replaceable Unit   Gigabyte   High Voltage Power Supply   Black   Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation  Liquid Crystal Display   Light Emitting Diode   Low Voltage Power Supply   Magenta   Multipurpose Feeder   Microswitch   Nonvolatile Random Access Memory  Optical Sensor   Photoconductor   Picture element   Power On Reset   Power On Self Test   Pulse Width Modulation   Raster Imaging Processor  Synchronous Dual Random Access Memory  Single Inline Memory Module   Static Random Access Memory  Toner Adder Roller   Volts alternating current   Volts direct current   Yellow    5022 xxx    2  Diagnostic information    Start    CAUTION    Remove the power cord from the printer or wall outlet before you connect or disconnect any    cable or electronic card or assembly for personal safety
28.   non duplex   C520n C522n C524   C524n    Front access door cover assembly  duplex   C5380dn C532dn C534dn  Front access door cover assembly  non duplex   C532n C534n   Left cover   Bin full sensor with cable  C520n C522n C524n C524dn   Bin full sensor with cable  C53x       Parts catalog 7 3    5022 xxx    Front    Assembly 2       7 4 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 2  Front    Units    Units  Description  mach   FRU p    40X1446  40X1432    40X1420    40X3593    40X1419  40X1418  40X3592  40X3590  40X3615  40X3614  40X1435  40X1447  40X1405  40X3573  40X3614    Fuser cable cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X1430   C52x  Fuser cable cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X3598   C53x  Printer pad  included in parts packet   screws  P N 40X1431   Right bellcrank assembly   Bump aligner gear kit  including     e Align idler gear  1    e First reduction gear  1    e Second reduction gear  1   e Grease packet  1    e Washers  3     Front door parts packet  C52x  including    e A   Right cable assembly  1   e B   Front door cap  1   e C   Left cable assembly  1     Front door parts packet  C53x  including    e A   Right cable assembly  1   e B   Front door cap  1   e C   Left cable assembly  1     Duplex front door assembly  C524dn   Front door assembly  C520n C522n C524n   Duplex front door assembly  C530dn C532dn C534dn  Front door assembly  C532n C534n    Deflector assembly  C53x    Bump aligner roller and spring   MPF swing arm assembly  C52x   Left bellcrank as
29.   see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     946 04 Transfer Roll Black transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     947 01 Transfer Roll Yellow transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     947 02 Transfer Roll Cyan transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     947 03 Transfer Roll Magenta transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     947 04 Transfer Roll Black transfer roll has failed  POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error  service check    on page 2 48     950 00   950 29 NVRAM   Mismatch between operator panel POR the printer  If the error message persists  see  Mismatch assembly NVRAM and system card    950 00   950 29 EPROM mismatch failure    on  NVRAM  page 2 50     950 30   950 60 NVRAM   Mismatch between system card POR the printer  If the error message persists  see  Mismatch NVRAM and smart chip card or    950 30 950 60 EPROM mismatch failure    on  printhead NVRAM  page 2 50     951 01 951 99 NVRAM   
30.   sensors  bin full 7 12  exit sensor service check 2 52  input sensor service check 2 52  locations 5 8  theory 3 42  toner level 4 83  7 10   serial number  location 1 13  viewing 3 16   service checks  110 xx   Mirror motor 2 27  111 xx   114 xx   Printhead error 2 27  120 01  120 02  120 08   120 10  120 13 120 15      Fuser error 2 28  120 03   Fuser error 2 30  120 04 120 07   Fuser error 2 30  140 xx   Autocomp motor error 2 32  142 xx   fuser motor error 2 33  143 xx   EP drive asm top cartridge motor 2 34  144 xx   EP drive asm bottom cartridge  motor error  2 35   145 xx   bump aligner motor error 2 36  146 xx   duplex motor error 2 36  147 xx  149 xx   500 550 sheet option motor error 2 37  147 xx 149 xx   500 sheet option motor error 2 37  148 xx   MPF motor error 2 37  906 01   906 04   fuser motor error 2 33  906 05   906 08   bump aligner motor error 2 36  910 01    transparency sensor error 2 38  920 01   POST error 2 38  920 02   POST error 2 38  920 03   POST error 2 38  920 04   POST error 2 39  920 05   POST error 2 39  920 06   POST error 2 40  920 07   POST error 2 40  920 08   POST error 2 40  920 09 920 12   POST error 2 41  920 13   POST error 2 43  920 14   POST error 2 44  920 15   POST error 2 45  920 16   POST error 2 45  920 17   POST error 2 46  920 18   POST error 2 46  920 19   POST error 2 46  925 01   fan error 2 47  945 xx  946 xx  947 xx   Transfer roll error 2 48  950 00   950 29 EPROM mismatch failure 2 50  950 30   950 60 EPROM mismatch
31.  1  Select Button Test from HARDWARE TESTS in the Diagnostics mode         gt  Button Test   o ooo   O ooo   E O Oooo  eo 000       2  Press each button one at a time  and an X appears in the box that represents that button   When you press Back      or Stop       the test ends     Press Back or Stop to cancel the test   DRAM Test    This test checks the validity of DRAM  both standard and optional  The test writes patterns of data to DRAM to  verify that each bit in memory can be set and read correctly     To run the DRAM Test     Select DRAM Test from HARDWARE TESTS in DIAGNOSTICS  The power indicator blinks indicating the test is  in progress     Note  Turn off the printer to exit the test before the test is complete     DRAM Test 128M  P   JHHHHHF F   7HHHHF    P        represents the number of times the memory test has passed and finished successfully  Initially   000000 displays with the maximum pass count being 99 999     F       represents the number of times the memory test has failed and finished with errors  Initially  00000  displays with the maximum fail count being 99 999     Once the maximum pass count or fail count is reached  the test is stopped  the power indicator turns on solid   and the final results appear  If the test fails  SDRAM Error appears for approximately three seconds and the  failure count increases by 1     Diagnostic aids 3 11    5022 xxx    CACHE Test    The CACHE Test is used to verify the processor CACHE is functioning properly     1  Sele
32.  2  Select Single or Continuous     e The single Duplex Quick test cannot be canceled   e The printer attempts to print the Quick Test Page from the default paper source     e Check the Quick Test Page for the correct offset between the placement of the first scan line on the  front and back side of a duplexed sheet     The single test stops automatically when a single duplex sheet is printed  and the continuous test continues until  you press Stop          Print Test  duplex     This test provides service personnel with a way to verify the function of the printer s duplex hardware  After the   user selects this test  the device automatically executes a continuous print test that generates a duplexed  color  output page  To stop the test  the user must press Stop       While this test executes  the power indicator light  blinks green and the panel displays    DUPLEX TESTS Printing                          The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4     To run the Print Test  duplex      1  Select Print Test from DUPLEX TESTS  The printer executes a continuous print test that generates a  duplexed  color output page     2  To stop the test  press Stop          Diagnostic aids 3 13    5022 xxx    Top Margin  duplex     This setting controls the offset between the first scan line on the front of the duplex page and the first scan line  on the back of the page  Therefore  be sure to set the top margin in REGISTRATION before setting the duplex  top marg
33.  610mm   440 mm   558 mm   29 4 kg   Printer  duplex unit  C534dtn 24 in  17 3 in  22 in  64 0 Ib  550 sheet assembly  610mm   440 mm   558 mm   29 0 kg   Optional 500 sheet C52x models 5 in  16 5 in  20 4 in  7 25  b  assembly only  127 mm   420 mm   518 mm   3 29 kg   Optional 550 sheet C53x models 5 in  16 5 in  20 4 in  7 0 Ib  assembly only  420 mm   3 2 kg   MPF configuration C52x  C53x models 19 in  17 3 in  26 6 in  57 5  b   printer with  484 mm   440 mm   676 mm   26 1 kg   multipurpose feeder    extended and exit tray  extended     Primary tray A4 letter size media 19 in  17 3 in  20 2 in   configuration  printer  484 mm   440 mm   512 mm   with paper tray  adjuster extended and  output bin installed    Legal size media    Note  A buffer of 12 in   804 8 mm  is needed on the back of the printer        General information 1 5    5022 xxx    Media specifications    Paper and specialty media guidelines    Media guidelines    Media characteristics    The following media characteristics affect print quality and reliability  Consider these characteristics when  evaluating new media stock     Weight    The printer can automatically feed media weights from 60 to 176 g m   16 to 47 lb bond  grain long  Media  lighter than 60 g m   16 Ib  might not be stiff enough to feed properly  causing jams  For best performance  use  90 g m   24 Ib bond  grain long media  For media smaller than 182 x 257 mm  7 2 x 10 1 in    we recommend 90  g m  or heavier media     Curl    Curl is the
34.  7 20  KOCOT a  etc 6 I ca a Re a Da a a a E 7 20  MarkNet N8050 802 119 wireless print server  rest of world   C524 C524n C524dn C534n C534dn    7 20  40 0 GB hard disk assembly  C524n C524dn C534n C534dn C534dtn                          7 20  Forms card  C524 C524n CS524dn              2 ce ect rer re ee eer eee eee 7 20  Bar code card  C524 C524n C524dn                                          7       7 20  Fuser assembly  115 V   lt     ss 460420 e se ee eee eee er eee eee eee ee eee es 6 1  7 15  Fuser assembly  230 V    lt    262 sence ees cc eee ere ee eee eto ees 6 1  7 15  Fuser assembly  100 V    lt      lt  lt  20s ees see ee ee i ee ei tn ee eee 6 1  7 15  Transfer belt assembly  C53x              2 ee ec rte tre reece ee eee ee eee 6 1  7 15  Paper pick mechanism assembly  C53x               02 2   rect r reece e ree eeee 7 5  Low voltage power supply  115 230 V            22 ee ee ee ee eee ce eee 7 7  System card  network   C530dn CS532n C532dn                                          7 9  System card  network   C534n             22 e eee ree te re er eee ee ere eeee  7 9  System card  network   C534dn                                          7  77 7 7       7 9  EP drive assembly  C53x           22 c cre cr rt re er re eee eens 7 7  High voltage power supply  C53xK            2 cece rece ree rte eee eee ee eee  7 11  Front access door cover assembly  non duplex   C532n C534n                                7 3  Operator panel assembly  C530dn C532n C532dn      
35.  9  and A through F     Note  When the printer detects a Configuration ID that is not defined or invalid  the following occurs   e The default standard model Configuration ID is used instead   e Configuration ID is the only function available in DIAGNOSTICS   e Unless the menu is in DIAGNOSTICS  Check Config ID displays     3 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    To set the configuration ID     1  Select Printer Setup from the Diagnostic mode   2  Select Configuration ID from the Printer Setup menu   Submitting Selection displays  followed by the value for Configuration ID 1   3  Enter the Configuration ID 1   e To select a digit or character to change  press  lt  or P until the digit or character is underlined   e To change a digit or character  press A to increase or W to decrease the value     e When the last digit is changed  press Qto validate the Configuration ID 1     lf Invalid ID appears  the entry is discarded  and the previous Configuration ID 1 is displayed on  the screen     If the process is successful  Submitting Selection appears on the display  followed by the  current value for Configuration ID 2     4  Repeat the steps for entering the Configuration ID  and press D     If the Configuration ID 2 is validated  Submitting Selection appears  and a check  y   appears next to  Printer Setup     5  Restart the printer     EP Setup    EP Defaults    This setting is used to restore each printer setting listed in EP SETUP to its factory default value  Sometimes this  is u
36.  C5  C6  B6    28 to 32 Ib  105 to 120 g m         Input and output capacities    The following table outlines the input and output source capacities by media type     Maximum Approximate reference  height capacity  Standard 250 sheet tray  Plain paper   250 sheets  75 g m    Optional 500 sheet tray  C52x  or Plain paper   57 6 mm 500 sheets  80 g m    Optional 550 sheet tray  C53x   550 sheets  75 g m    Multipurpose feeder  Plain paper 100 sheets  75 g m      Various quantities    Manual feed slot Single sheet 1 sheet  Standard 250 sheet output bin      Plain Paper 250 sheets  75 g m      1 20 Ib xerographic paper at ambient environment    2 Capacity may vary and is subject to media specifications and printer operating environment   Note  Paper input is limited to below the input source indicator on the tray        Print area    The printable area is limited to within 4 2 mm  0 167 in   of all edges of the media  Any information placed  outside this specified printable area does not print     1 12 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Serial number and machine type    The serial number is located on the label on the rear of the right cover and on the service tag located on the  inside right frame of the printer  The service tag also contains the configuration IDs  machine type  and model  information         Config IDs  Machine type  Serial number       Serial number    Tools required for service    Flat blade screwdriver    1 Phillips screwdriver  magnetic   2 Phillips screwdriver
37.  Front access door cover assembly removal    See Front access door cover assembly for the part number for the models you need on page 7 3     Remove the paper tray    Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A     Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly   Note  Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing     m ade a    Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged period of time  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     Model C52x Model C53x       4 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint  C   twist the end clockwise  slide the restraint upward  through the slit  D   and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole  E   Repeat for the other side     ol       6  Close the front access door     Repair information 4 17    5022 xxx    T  Remove the four screws  F  that attach the pivot pin to the front access door cover        8  Remove the front access cover assembly     4 18 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Gearbox shield removal    Not a FRU   1  Remove the paper tray   2  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   3  Remove the four scr
38.  Go to step 2  Set the switch for the proper  the low voltage power supply  LVPS   country voltage     Is the voltage level  115 230  properly set     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the fuser cable  Go to step 3   Check the connector JFUSER1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Go to step 4  Replace the appropriate  page 4 60  Check the AC and DC cable    autoconnects on both the fuser and the printer   for damage    Are the connectors damaged        2 30 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Check for the following continuity between DC   Goto step 5  Replace the DC fuser cable   autoconnect and JFUSER1     I  mal  3  517  9   rag 2 141618  10    configuration    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    Is continuity present           Reinstall the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Go to step 7   page 4 60     Does the error clear     Check for continuity between the following pins   Go to step 6  Replace the AC fuser cable   of the AC autoconnect and the pins of the  connector that connects to the LVPS     z pin 1 ad  LVPS connector  LVPS connector AC autoconnect  Is continuity present     Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Replace the system card   page 4 60  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     Diagnostic 
39.  Install printer  covers when you are not working on the printer  and do not put unprotected ESD sensitive parts ona  table    e If possible  keep all ESD sensitive parts in a grounded metal cabinet  case     e Be extra careful in working with ESD sensitive parts when cold weather heating is used  because low  humidity increases static electricity     Repair information 4 1    5022 xxx    Handing the photoconductor unit    The following precautions must be observed when handling the photoconductor unit  The photoconductor unit is  a supply item you will have to remove during some of the repair procedures     Transportation storage  Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the photoconductor unit     Handling    e The optical photoconductor roller in the photoconductor unit exhibits the greatest light fatigue after being  exposed to strong light over an extended period of time  Never expose it to direct sunlight  Cover the  photoconductor unit when you remove it from the printer     e Use care not to contaminate the surface of the optical photoconductor roller with an oil based solvent   fingerprints  and other foreign matter   e Do not scratch the surface of the optical photoconductor roller     Parts not to be touched    Any part where the mounting screws are used to meet a printer alignment set at the factory must not be  removed  disassembled  or adjusted     4 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Adjustments    Printhead alignment    Overview    When reinstalling th
40.  Japanese font card   Bar code card  C524 C524n C524dn   Bar code card  C534n C534dn   PrintCryption card  C524 C524n C524dn   PrintCryption card  C534n C534dn   Forms card  C524 C524n C524dn   Forms card  C534n C534dn   MarkNet N8000 fast ethernet print server  C524 C524dn   MarkNet N8020 gigabit ethernet print server  C524 C524dn C534n C534dn  MarkNet N8030 fiber ethernet print server  C524 C524dn C534 C534dn    MarkNet N8050 802 11g wireless print server  US Americas   C524   C524dn C534n C534dn    MarkNet N8050 802 119 wireless print server  rest of world    C524 C524n C524dn C534n C534dn    Parallel 1284 B interface card adapter  C524 C524n C524dn  C534n   C534dn    Serial interface card adapter  C524 C524n C524dn  C534n C534dn  40 0 GB hard disk assembly  C524n C524dn C534n C534dn C534dtn  Printer relocation kit       Options tray relocation kit    Index    Numerics  1xx service error codes 2 7 2 8  24 V interlock switch   locations 5 6   parts catalog 7 12   removal 4 85   theory 3 55  2xx paper jam codes 2 8   2 15  3x   8x attendance messages 2 19    2 26  5 V interlock switch   locations 5 3   parts catalog 7 6   removal 4 54   theory 3 54  9xx service error codes 2 15   2 18    A    accessing service menus 3 1  acronyms 1 14  adjustments 4 3  Align Motor Test 3 8  alignment  diagnostics menu 3 7  printhead 4 3  Auto Align Adj 3 23  Auto Color Adj 3 23    B   bellcrank  left bellcrank 4 64  parts catalog 7 5  right bellcrank 4 77   bezel  inner   C52x 4 22  7   oute
41.  MOTOR TESTS from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Mirror Motor Test   The panel displays Mirror Motor Test   After the test completes  the panel displays either Pass or Fail     To stop the test  press Stop          3 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Motor Calibration    This test is run to match the fuser motor speed to the belt motor speed     1  Select MOTOR TESTS from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Motor Calibration   The printer generates eight pages as part of this test     To stop the test  press Stop        Servo Laser Test    1  Select MOTOR TESTS from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Servo Laser Test   The panel displays Servo Laser Test  After the test completes  the panel displays either Pass or Fail     To stop the test  press Stop        Print Tests    Input source tests    The purpose of the diagnostic Print Tests is to verify that the printer can print on media from each of the installed  input options  The contents of the Print Test Page varies depending on the media installed in the selected input  source                       Check each Test Page from each source to assist in print quality and paper feed problems   To run the Print Test Page     1  Select PRINT TESTS from the DIAGNOSTICS     2  Select the media source     Tray 1  Tray 2  if installed   MP Feeder    3  Select Single or Continuous     Diagnostic aids 3 9    5022 xxx    e lf Single is selected  a single page is printed     lf Continuous is selected  printing continues until Stop      is pressed to cancel the test     
42.  Manual    5022 xxx  Multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm assembly removal   models C52x only    See    MPF swing arm assembly  C52x    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Open the top access door   2  Open the front access door   3  Remove the three mounting screws  A         4  Remove the swing arm assembly from the frame     Installation note  Refer to the following illustration if the swing arm crank comes loose from the swing arm  assembly  Make sure the end of the spring  B  is under the retaining tab  C  on the swing arm crank after  installation     Note  Spring end  B  is shown disengaged from swing arm crank     ss    cuit            _  z gt     gt     A    A                        _     _     _           E         Repair information 4 67    5022 xxx    Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    Paper pick mechanism assembly  C52x    on page 7 5 or    Paper pick mechanism assembly  C53x     on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25   2  Disconnect the JTRAY1  A  and JTRAY2  B  connectors from the system card                                                Lr   A   N       A B  3  Remove all toner cartridges     4  For models C52x only  If installed  remove the MPF swing arm assembly  See    Multipurpose feeder   MPF  swing arm assembly removal   models C52x only    on page 4 67     4 68 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Remove the three mounting screws  C    6  Release the front locking tabs  D    7 
43.  OPT_PSIZE   OPT _PCTL           0    5 20 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C53x   see    System card  network    models C53x    on page 5 18   continued     Connector    JOPP1    JPH1    lI2C_DATA5 OP  V_PANEL 5V  lI2C_CLK_OP  Ground  I2CIRQ5_R    3 3 V dc   Ground   Ground   D_VDO_C    D VDO C   Ground   D_VDO_Y   D_VDO_Y   Ground  PH_EMS1_SNS R  VDO_BOOST1  VDO_LPOW1  VDO_LADJO1  VDO_HADJO1   PH _EMSO  VDO_BOOSTO0  VDO_LPOWO  VS_ 5VPH_NVX_R  PH EOS THERM_SNS   5V_PH  I2C_CLK_PH  lI2C_DATA_PH  VDO_LENA   PH _EMS2_ SNS R  VDO_BOOST2  VDO_LPOW2  VDO_LADJ23  VDO_HYSNC1  PH_EMS3_SNS_R  VDO_BOOST3  VDO_LPOW3  Ground    10  11  12  13  14  15  16  17  18  19  20  21  22  23  24  25  26  2   28  29  30    Locations and connectors 5 21    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C53x   see    System card  network    models C53x    on page 5 18   continued     ee e  JPH1  continued  D VDO K     34 D_VDO_M   35 D_VDO_M     36 Ground     Ground  e  ss  se sew   S SB C   E   e  eoms  e feve   1    JTRANS1 V_TRANS_PHA     V_TRANS_PHA   V_TRANS_PHB   JTRANS2  JTRAY1    V_TRANS_PHB   JTRAY2    VS_5V_TPS  5 22 Service Manual       ar ii    V_JTRANS 9   3 3V   TPS_PWM1  TPS_SNS_RTN TPS_THERM_SNS  Ground l2C_CLK_TB   I2 DATA TB V_TRANS  1   3 3V   Ground N C    VS_TRAY_INPT_LED    5V     S_TRAY_INPUT  Ground  VS_TRAY 5V_NMT  TRAY_NMT   3 3v   Ground      VS_TRAY_ENC_LED  S_TRAY_ENC  Ground  V_TRAY_PICK_M   V_TRAY_PICK_M     TPS_SNS           i         Z  O    5022 xxx  
44.  Power On Self Test  Check for correct POST functioning of the base  printer by observing the following     12     The main drive motor turns on   14   15   16     Oe PRA ee    The LED turns on    The main fan turns on    The operator panel turns on    A partial row of pixels appears    The operator panel display clears    Another row of pixels appears    The operator panel display clears again    The operator panel displays system information  For example        206MB S00Mhz      The fuser lamp turns on  The fuser takes longer to warm up from a cold start than a warm start       The operator panel LED starts blinking     Aclock face appears on the display     The following errors or messages may appear   e Close Dooror Insert Cartridge display if the upper front cover is open or the print cartridge is  missing   e Any cartridge errors  such aS Defective Cartridge or Missing Cartridge   Ready appears on the display     The EP drive assembly drives the developer shaft located in the toner cartridge     The exit rollers turn   The printer calibrates     Diagnostic information 2 5    5022 xxx    Symptom tables    Printer symptom table    Dead printer Go to    Dead printer service check    on page 2 51     Operator panel   one or more buttons do Go to    One or more operator panel buttons fail    on  not work  page 2 53     Operator panel   display is blank  Printer Go to    Operator panel display blank  five beeps  and LED   sounds five beeps  off    on page 2 53    Operator pan
45.  Printhead removal    on  page 4 74        Diagnostic information 2 45    5022 xxx    920 17   POST  power on self test  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the top access Go to step 2   Check the connector JBIN1 for proper cover assembly  See    Top   connection to the system card  the cable for access cover assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal   model C52x   any other damage  only    on page 4 28 or    Top   access cover assembly   removal   model C53x   only    on page 4 32     Is the cable damaged     Replace the top access cover assembly     Top Problem solved  Replace the system card   access cover assembly removal   model See    System card   C52x only    on page 4 28 or    Top access removal    on page 4 79   cover assembly removal   model C53x   only    on page 4 32     Does the error clear        920 18   POST  power on self test  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the option cable  Go to step 2   Check the connector JOPT1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged   Replace the 500 sheet assembly  C52x Problem solved  Replace the system card     models  or the 550 sheet assembly  C53x See    System card  models   removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        920 19   POST  power on self test  error service check    Models C52x only  
46.  Replace the transfer belt  Contact your next level of  transfer belt  See    Transfer belt Support   removal    on page 4 91        Print quality   residual image    Service tip  Install a new print cartridge if available before doing this service check  Residual image can be  caused by the photoconductor  cleaning blade  and other parts inside the print cartridge     Is there any toner contamination on the fuser Replace the fuser  See Contact your next level of  assembly     Fuser removal    on support   page 4 60        Diagnostic information 2 59    5022 xxx    Print quality   solid color page    Service tip  A solid color page is generally caused by a problem in the high voltage system or an incorrect high  voltage in the printing process resulting in toner development on the entire photoconductor drum     Questions   actions    Replace the photoconducior unit for the color  in question     Does this fix the problem     Check the high voltage contact from the HVPS  to the photoconductor charge roll  Ensure the  contact springs are properly mounted and that  the charge roll contact spring is making good  contact with the HPVS spring that runs through  the left printer frame  See    Transfer contact  assembly removal    on page 4 92 to view the  proper mounting and for removal procedures     High volt power supply    High volt contact path    Note  Printer is shown with  components removed for  clarity    Are the spring s  defective     Turn the printer off  and check the 
47.  Select  A page similar to this one prints     Top left alignment marks Top right alignment marks    Left margin  alignment  marks    Lexmak C2X  Quick Teg  Printer lformaton Margin Settings  Page Count XX Top Margin  x  PSAC XX Bottom Margin  x  Installed Memory xxx MB Left Margin  x  Processor Speed xxxMHZz Right Margin  x  Serial Number XXXXXXX Skew  x  CalStat XXXX Cyan Top Margin  x  CalSet X XX X XX X XX Cyan Left Margin   XX  X XX X XX Cyan Right Margin   x  Engine ID XX Cyan Skew  X  FSpeed XXX Cyan Bow  x  Printer Revision Levels Yellow Top Margin   x  Loader XX XX XXXX X Yellow Left Margin   x  Kernel XXX XX XXXX X Yellow Right Margin   x  Base XX XX XXXX X Yellow Skew  X  Network XXX XX XXXXX X Yellow Bow  X  Network Drvr XX XX XXXX X Magenta Top Margin    Engine XX XX XXXX X o ee    Font X XXXXX XX X agenta Rig argin   H 1  Magen Skew ae Right margin  magenta Bow  x    Dup Top Margin  x alignment  Paper Source marks    Formatted Size       Bottom margin alignment marks    Repair information 4 5    5022 xxx    9  Adjust the screw to adjust the skew and straighten the image on the paper   If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks  rotate the alignment screw  counterclockwise a full revolution  and print the Quick Test page  Repeat adjusting the screw and printing  the Quick Test until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of the media   Note  One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0 
48.  Slide the paper pick mechanism forward until the rear locking tabs  E  release        8  Lower the paper pick mechanism  and remove through the front of the printer   Note  Make sure the JIRAY1 and JI RAY2 connectors do not bind when passing through the frame  access hole     Repair information 4 69    5022 xxx    Photoconductor unit removal    Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and    ee    place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on  page 4 2 for additional information    Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Lift the right end handle  A  of the photoconductor unit  releasing from the mount    Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer  ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released    from the holding pin  B         B    Installation note  If a new photoconductor unit is installed  reset the life count value in the printer memory     e  fa message appears on the operator panel     1     When 84  lt color gt  PC Unit Life Warningor84 Replace  lt co or gt  PC Unit appears   select Supply Replaced  and then press       Replace Supply displays    Select Cyan PC Unit  Magenta PC Unit  Yellow PC Unit  or Black PC Unit based on the  photoconductor unit that was just replaced  and then press        lt color gt  PC Unit Replaced displays    Select Yes  and then press    to clear the message     o message appears     Press     
49.  Step 2   Press the up or down buttons until a check appears at the setting in need of adjustment     Press Select  Then use the  lt  and  gt  buttons to enter the new value  Press Select to save     scales  then use the coarse adjustment scales at the top of the page      lt P NOTE  If the alignment values cannot be determined by using the fine adjustment    STEP 2  Go to the next page to adjust the Left  L  margin  Right  R  margin  and Bow  P      STEP 3  Reprint these pages to confirm final settings     Go To Step 2       Repair information 4 9    5022 xxx    6  Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest  If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale   use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales        Top  T  Coarse Adjustment    O    240  160  80    If the alignment is not close enough to use  the fine adjustment  get close to the ideal  value by using the coarse adjustment  marks  Select the block that is most filled  by the color on the left  or approximate if   80  60  40  20 O 20 40 60 80 none of the blocks are completely filled  and enter it in for the new value  Reprint  the quick test page and then use the fine  adjustment      80   160    Oo  wait    240         Top  T  Fine Adjustment    20  18    5 First  locate the line of the color that you   4 are aligning that lines up best with the   D sacle line  In this example  it is  18  If none  0 of the colored lines match up  use the   D coarse adjustment to get close  reprint this  A page and then 
50.  T a ee  t              w     i    3  Snap into place   4  Replace the screw on the right side     Repair information 4 47    5022 xxx    Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly removal   model C52x only    See i   or for the part number     Remove the low voltage power supply  See   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove all the toner cartridges    Disconnect the JTRANS2 connector  A  from the system card     Se       A       4 48 Service Manual    5022 xxx    T  Remove the six inner screws  D            D D    8  Remove the nine outer screws  E    Note  Access the top two screws through the top cover        9  Remove the EP drive assembly from the printer     Repair information 4 49    5022 xxx    Installation note  Ensure that the top access door is open and EP drive is retracted when installing the new EP  drive assembly     Note  When retracted  the upper  F  and lower retraction plates  G  will be fully forward  If not  slide the upper  retraction plate forward until the EP drive retracts and is disengaged from the developers           4 50 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly removal   model C53x only    See    EP drive assembly  C53x    on page 7 7 for the part number     Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove all the toner cartridges    Remove the six inner screws  A      oS a       A A  6  Disconnect JCART1  B   JC
51.  VDO_BOOST1  VDO_LPOW1  VDO_LADJO1  VDO_HADJO1   PH _EMSO  VDO_BOOSTO0  VDO_LPOWO  VS_ 5VPH_NVX_R  PH EOS THERM_SNS   5V_PH  I2C_CLK_PH  I2C_DATA_PH  VDO_LENA   PH _EMS2_SNS R  VDO_BOOST2  VDO_LPOW2  VDO_LADJ23  VDO_HYSNC1  PH_EMS3_SNS_R  VDO_BOOST3  VDO_LPOW3  Ground    O    Locations and connectors 5 15    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C52x   see    System card  network    models C52x    on page 5 11 or    System card  non network    models C52x    on  page 5 12   continued     Connector    JPH1  continued     3       b    D_VDO_K   2 D VDO_ K   33 Ground  4 D_VDO_Y   D_VDO_Y   36 Ground    e fse  e fess  S_SB_C  e eoo  e  eme   3 3 V dc  JTRANS1 VS_JTRANS 1   5V   11  13    oO    O1    ie T       Ground  I2C_DATA_TB  TRANS BELT SNS    PE   a5  VS_5V_TPS       I2C_ CLK _SB  VS_JTRANS 5  5V SW   TRANS THERM SNS  VS_JTRANS 9   3 3V   TPS_GAIN_ADJ  TPS THERM SNS  V_TRANS_PHA     TPS_SNS  TPS_SNS_RTN  N C           JTRAN2  V_TRANS_PHA   V_TRANS_PHB   V_TRANS_PHB   VS_TRAY_INPT_LED    5V     S_TRAY_INPUT  Ground  VS_TRAY 5V_NMT  TRAY_NMT   3 3v   Ground   N C    JTRAY1    5 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C52x   see    System card  network    models C52x    on page 5 11 or    System card  non network    models C52x    on  page 5 12   continued     a a  JTRAY2 VS TRAY ENC LED    V_ TRAY PICK M   V_ TRAY PICK M        Locations and connectors 5 17    5022 xxx    System card  network    models C53x                                                
52.  aligner roller               Repair information 4 43    5022 xxx    Contact springs removal    See    Contact springs    on page 7 17 for the part number     1  Remove all the toner cartridges   2  Remove the screw  A  and the spring cap  B  of the appropriate contact spring        A B    3  Press the lower half  C  D  of the springs and remove the springs     N A  a    Mis       4 44 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes  When installing  make sure the top half  E  of the spring is under the straight spring  F   This  is typical for both types of springs  Also make sure the bottom half  D G  of both springs are compressed and  locked by the appropriate locking tabs  H  1      F E       Repair information 4 45    5022 xxx    Deflector assembly removal   models C53x only    See    Deflector assembly  C53x    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   2  Remove the screw  A  securing the deflector assembly on the right side     CA pe       3  Place a flathead screwdriver between the deflector assembly and the right side frame  and lever the  deflector away from the frame        a  p g            4  Pivot the deflector out  and remove     4 46 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes     1  Align the two studs  A  to the two alignment holes  B  in the left side frame        B A  2  Align the stud  C  with the alignment hole  D  on the right frame                  uae        pi  i   ii afinar  pi
53.  and to prevent damage to the printer   Use the handholds on the side of the printer  Make sure your fingers are not under the printer  when you lift or set the printer down        Use the service error code  user status message  user error message  symptom table  service checks  and  diagnostic aids in this chapter to determine the corrective action necessary to repair a malfunctioning printer   They will lead you to solutions or service checks  including use of various tests     Symptom tables    If your printer completes the    Power on self test  POST  sequence    on page 2 5 without an error  and you  have a symptom  go to    Symptom tables    on page 2 6  Locate your symptom  and take the appropriate action     Service errors  1XX XX 9XX XX     lf a service error code appears while you are working on the printer  go to    Service error codes and paper jam  messages    on page 2 7  and take the indicated action for that error     Service error codes are indicated by a three digit error code followed by a period and additional numbers in the  format XXX YY  In most cases  five digits are shown     Paper jam messages  2xxX xx   User attendance messages that indicate a paper jam these have been included with the service error codes  since repeated instances may indicate an underlying service issue  Go to    2xx paper jam messages    on  page 2 8   User status and attendance messages  e User status messages provide the user with information on the current status of the print
54.  any data received through the serial port    Make sure the Serial Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled    If this does not fix the problem  replace the PCI card     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message   The printer discards any data received through the USB port   Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79    Turn off and unplug the printer    Remove the excess flash memory    Plug in the printer  and turn it on     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     This printer does not support the 500 sheet assembly     Turn off and unplug the printer   Remove the 500 sheet paper tray assembly   Plug in the printer  and turn it on     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Install a different hard disk before performing any operations that require a hard disk     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     62 Disk full    63 Unformatted disk    64 Unsupported disk  format    80 Fuser life warning    80 Replace fuser    82 Waste toner box  nearly full    82 Replace waste to
55.  appropriate side cover that corresponds to the  damaged pad  It is necessary to remove the corresponding side cover to see if the pad fully seats in the  installation holes  B      Repair information 4 73    5022 xxx    Printhead removal    See    Printhead assembly  C52x    on page 7 9 or    Printhead assembly  C53x    on page 7 9 for the part  number     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the toner cartridges    2  Remove the exit tray cover  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15    3  Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A     4  Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly   Note  Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing     Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged period of time  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     C52x C53x            5  Remove the system card support shield  See    System card suppo
56.  be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check the duplex paper path for damage that  would obstruct the print  If damage is found   replace the duplex front door assembly  See     Front door assembly removal    on   page 4 55     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the duplex paper path that  might cause the paper to jam  This includes the  paper guides in tray 1     If clearing the paper jam does not fix the  problem and the paper is fan folded  replace the  front access assembly  See    Front door  assembly removal    on page 4 55     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Diagnostic information 2 11    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     orem  Omen ooo    230 04    230 05  230 21    241 03  241 04    2 12 Service Manual    During duplex printing  the input  sensor is made while the previous  page is still in the aligner     Possible causes   e Defective input sensor  e Faulty system card  During duplex printing  the input  sensor is not made   Possible causes   e Obstructed duplex path  e Defective input sensor  e Faulty system card  e Faulty duplex drive    Duplex motor stalled   Possible causes   e Obstructed duplex path  e Defective duplex motor  e Faulty system card    While feeding from tray 1  the input  sensor does not break     P
57.  be printed that will be  used to align the black plane to the printer frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment  screw  Once black skew is adjusted  the mounting screws will be fully tightened     There is one printhead that houses the four color planes  The black plane is aligned to the printer  and the color  planes are internally aligned to black  Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes  to the black plane once the printhead is installed     The first step in aligning the printhead is to set the skew for black   Printhead mechanical alignment  Skew  black     1  During installation of the printhead  the printhead s lower right corner slot  as seen when looking through  the rear of the printer  and the hole in the frame  A  should have been visually aligned        Repair information 4 3    5022 xxx    2  Remove the paper exit tray for access to the printhead alignment screw  B         Enter Diagnostic mode  turn off the printer  press and hold W and  gt   turn on the printer  and release the  buttons when the clock graphic displays     Select REGISTRATION    Select Skew    Adjust this setting to zero  and press Select   Q       Press Back           Sore  p    4 4 Service Manual    5022 xxx    8  Scroll down to Quick Test  and press Select  A page similar to this one prints     Top left alignment marks Top right alignment marks    Left margin  alignment  marks    Lexmak C2X  Quick Teg  Printer lformaton Margin Set
58.  causes   e Faulty cable connector  e Faulty fuser motor  e Faulty system card    During duplex printing retract  the exit  sensor is never made     Possible causes     Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    Damaged fuser autoconnect  Faulty fuser DC cable connection  Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    During duplex printing retract  the exit  sensor broke early     Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    e Faulty fuser   e Faulty system card  During duplex printing  the exit sensor  never broke   Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    e Obstructed duplex   e Faulty fuser   e Faulty system card  During duplex printing  the input  sensor is never made   Possible causes    e Obstructed duplex path   e Defective input sensor   e Faulty system card   e Faulty duplex drive       Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    142 xx and 906 01 906 04   Motor   fuser  error service check    on page 2 33     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     The fuser exit sensor may not
59.  failure 2 50  dead printer 2 51  exit sensor 2 52  input sensor 2 52    5022 xxx    operator panel 2 53  print quality 2 55  service error codes 2 7  service tag location 1 13  Servo Laser Test 3 9  Size Sensing 3 22  skew 3 5  4 3  smart chip card   C52x  locations 5 4  parts catalog 7 8  removal 4 78  specifications  acoustics 1 4  data streams 1 2  dimensions 1 5  electrical 1 3  environment 1 4  media 1 6  memory configuration 1 2  performance factors 1 2  power requirements 1 3  resolution 1 2  Start 2 1  symptoms  print quality 2 6  printer 2 6  system card  connectors   C52x 5 11  5 12  connectors   C53x 5 18  locations 5 4  parts catalog 7 8  removal 4 79  system card support shield  parts catalog 7 8  removal 4 81    T  test pages  print quality test pages 3 10  3 21  Quick Test 3 6  quick test  duplex  3 12  theory  electrical interlock  24 V interlock switch 3 55  5 V interlock switch 3 54  electrophotographic  EP  process  charging 3 46  cleaning 3 53  developing 3 50  exposing 3 49  fusing 3 52  main components 3 44  transferring 3 51  electrophotographic process  EP  3 44  paper path 3 30  main components 3 32  mechanical drive 3 37  paper sensing 3 42  print media transport 3 33  toner cartridges  location 5 7    Index l 5    5022 xxx    toner level sensor  locations 5 5  parts catalog 7 10  removal 4 83  Toner Patch Sensing  TPS  3 23  tools required 1 13  top cover camshaft assembly  installation 4 87  locations 5 6  parts catalog 7 12  removal 4 86  transfe
60.  from the  operator panel     Navigation arrow buttons A  V    Press these buttons to scroll up or down through menus   menu items  or settings  called menu item values  or to scroll between  screens and menu values  Each press moves one item in the list or a  different setting for a menu item      lt 4         Press these buttons to scroll items that wrap off of the  screen  For menu items with numeric values  such as Copies  press   ED and hold this button to scroll through the values  Release the button  when the needed number appears        2 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Binion oF ah a    Indicator light The two toned light emitting diode called the indicator light on the  operator panel gives information about the status of the printer using  the colors red and green     Indicator light  status    Loff   Printer power is off   Printer power is off   is off     a green Printer is warming up  processing data  or  printing a job     Solid green Printer is on  but idle   Solid red Operator intervention is required     5 Stop Press   to stop or suspend all job activity  The   functions as a  x stop button   If printing  pressing   causes the Stop screen to appear on the  display     Sug Press to open the administration menus  These menus are only  available when the printer is in the Ready state    e Press to return to the previous screen   Note  This button is only active if   appears on the top left of the  screen     8   USB direct port Model C534 only  Insert a USB fla
61.  if  a  z i   aai mi  nn v     1  E  i        7 10 Service Manual    Assembly 5  Left    40X1416  40X1428  40X1411  40X3579    Toner level sensor    Transfer contact assembly    High voltage power supply  C52x  High voltage power supply  C53x    5022 xxx       Parts catalog 7 11    5022 xxx    Assembly 6  Top       7 12 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 6  Top    Units    Units            6 1 40X3613 1 1 Top cover camshaft assembly  2 40X1437 1 1 Top access door 24 V interlock switch    Parts catalog 7 13    5022 xxx    Customer replaceable units  CRUs     Assembly 7       1 14 Service Manual    Assembly 7  CRUs    5022 xxx    Units    Units  Description  mach   FRU p    mnOnoa    u   nWicn A A    40X3569  40X3570  40X3571  40X3607  40X1439    40X3600    40X1423  40X3595  40X1404  40X1424  40X3599  40X3596  40X1401  40X3572  40X0297  40X0288  40X0296  40X0278    40X0286    40X361 1  40X0287  40X0282  40X0279  40X0275  40X3609  40X0280  40X0276  40X0274  40X3610    i  i  i  i  i  i  l  i  i  i     i    ee a a a eo    Fuser assembly  115 V  Fuser assembly  230 V  Fuser assembly  100 V  Pick arm roll    Option tray assembly  500 sheet option  includes tray   C522n C524   C524n C524dn    Option tray assembly  550 sheet option  includes tray   C532n C532dn   C534n C534dn    Tray assembly  500 sheet  C522n C524 C524n C524dn  Tray assembly  550 sheet  C532n C532dn C534n C534dn  MPF paper tray assembly  250 sheet  C524 C524n C524dn  Paper tray assembly  single feeder  C520n C522
62.  mD a eR eae 7 11  System card support shield  C52x               eee eer rer er ee et re tence eee 7 9  Parts packet  C52xX           2 ere cert re re rt rr ee rr tere ce ne reece cee 7 5  Parts packet  cables  C52x               2 eee err ere te mnnn 7 19  Parts     206  Co  ORC  Co Car a a D e a e  a a D ea  a E T  7 5  7 20  Bump aligner gear kit                                            eee eee ee    eeee   e 7 5  Bump aligner motor                                     ef   rrr eee  e 7 7  Contact springs kit                2 2 2 ee ere ret eee re rt err ere re erences 7 17  MPF swing arm assembly C52x                                                       7 5    Part number index l 7    5022 xxx    40X1436  40X1437  40X1439  40X1440  40X1443  40X1445  40X1446  40X1447  40X1448  40X1449  40X1450  40X1451  40X1454  40X1455  40X1508  40X1509  40X1510  40X1512  40X1513  40X1514  40X1515  40X1562  40X2610  40X2663  40X2664  40X3569  40X3570  40X3571  40X3572  40X3573  40X3574  40X3575  40X3576  40X3577  40X3578  40X3579  40X3581  40X3582  40X3583  40X3585  40X3586  40X3587  40X3588  40X3589  40X3590  40X3592  40X3593  40X3594  40X3595  40X3596  40X3597  40X3598  40X3598  40X3599  40X3600  40X3601  40X3602  40X3604  40X3605    Front door 5 V interlock switch                                         7      7      7 7  Top access door 24 V interlock switch          lt     086 0008   nent ete oe ee oe es 7 13  Option tray assembly  500 sheet option  includes tray   C522n C524 C524
63.  occurs  Toner  Patch Sensing  TPS  is a diagnostic mechanism that automatically adjusts the printer toner density and  alignment settings     When TPS executes  the printer generates toner patches on the transfer belt  It then uses these to calculate the  appropriate amount of adjustment  if necessary     When an event initiates a TPS operation  the printer performs a toner density calibration  an alignment  calibration  or both of the calibrations     Selections are On  default  and Off   Auto Color Adj    Sets the suggested number of pages which the printer should print between consecutive calibrations   Selections are Off and the values between 100 and 1000 in increments of 50  The default is 500 pages     If the printer exceeds the set value while printing a job  it completes the current job and any other jobs received  while printing the current job before it initiates a calibration  The printer does not cancel or suspend an active job  in order to perform a calibration  If a user is in any of the menus  including the Configuration Menu and the  Diagnostics mode  an automatic color adjust calibration does not occur     Diagnostic aids 3 23    5022 xxx    Enforce Color Order    Lets the system support person set whether the color order of the cartridges inside the printer is enforced and if  messages appear     From top to bottom  as indicated by the color labels in the printer  the enforced toner cartridges order is yellow   cyan  magenta  and black     When On is selec
64.  off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the JCART2 cable    Go to step 2   Check the connector JCART2 for proper The cable parts packet   connection to the system card  the cable for contains one cartridge   pinch points  and the cable or connector for motor cable that works for   any other damage  either of the cartridge   motors        Is the cable damaged     Remove the right cover  Check for the following   Go to step 3  Replace the JCART2 cable   continuity between JCART2 and bottom The cable parts packet  cartridge connector  contains one cartridge  motor cable that works for  either of the cartridge  motors    gt  sage  ILULL np eii       fix   LS ap   kebel ein oe     a ERENT     ly is M i    P EN   i 7     N          F l  Bottom cartridge  motor connector  Is continuity present     Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48 or removal    on page 4 79      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly   removal   model C53x only    on page 4 51     Does the error clear     2 44 Service Manual    Models C52x only    920 15   POST  power on self test  error service check    5022 xxx    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JTRANS1 for proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any other damage  See    System card   network    models C52x    on page 
65.  on page 4 40  If the JBUMP1  connector is damaged on the system card  replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Check the bump aligner shaft and the mechanical system for binds   Replace the bump aligner motor  See    Bump aligner motor removal    on page 4 40     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Insert the transfer belt     For models C52x  Check connector JTRANS1 for proper connection to the system card   the cable for pinch points  and the cable or connector for any other damage  If the  connector is damaged on system card  replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     For models C53x  Check connector JTRANS2 for proper connection to the system card   the cable for pinch points  and the cable connector for any other damage  If the connector  is damaged on the system card  replace the system card  See    System card removal     on page 4 79    If the JTRANS1 cable  model C52x  or the JTIRANS2 cable  model C53x  is damaged   replace the front door assembly  See    Front door assembly removal    on page 4 55     Replace the transfer belt assembly  See    Transfer belt removal    on page 4 91     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing    Order a replacement transfer belt  When print quality is reduced  i
66.  on the page  tighten the  printhead mounting screws in the following order  Top middle  lower left  and lower right   11  Reinstall the paper exit tray and the fuser cable cover  Replace the covers     4 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Registration  black   Top Margin    1  Select Quick Test  REGISTRATION in the Diagnostics mode   or use the last Quick Test you used to  adjust skew     Top left alignment marks Top right alignment marks       Lexmark C524  Quick Test    2  Select Top Margin  and press Select    3  Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print   e Increasing the value  right arrow  moves the alignment marks down on the print   e Decreasing moves them up    4  Press Select        to save the value     5  Print the Quick Test page  and check the top alignment marks  Repeat adjustment of the top margin and  printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set     Bottom Margin    1  Select Bottom Margin  and press Select   2  Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching  the edge of the paper   e Increasing the value  right arrow  moves the alignment marks up on the page   e Decreasing the value  left arrow  moves the marks down on the page   3  Press Select        to save the value   4  Print the Quick Test page  and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted        Bottom margin alignment marks    Repair information 4 7    5022 xxx    Left Margin    1 
67.  page 4 32        Diagnostic information 2 53    5022 xxx    Operator panel display blank  five beeps  LED on    Service tip  The printer has detected a problem with the system card  the operator panel assembly cable  part of  the top cover access assembly   or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete  The printer emits  five beeps  and sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off     Check for ground between JOPP1 pin 4 and  ground     Is the voltage approximately 0 V dc     Check the operator panel assembly cable   Is the cable damaged        Replace the operator panel  assembly  See    Operator  panel assembly removal     on page 4 23     Go to step 2     Replace the top cover  access assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Operator panel display all diamonds  no beeps    Check the operator panel assembly cable   Is the cable damaged     Measure the voltage between JOPP1 pin 2  and ground on the system card     Is the voltage approximately  5 V dc        Replace the top access  cover assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Go to step 2     Replace the operator panel  assembly  See    Operator  panel assembly removal 
68.  particular test  you will be given the choice to run the motor in forward or  reverse  Other times  there will only be the option to run the motor in forward direction     Before you run any particular motor test  ensure you have configured the printer as directed in the following  table     Setup requirements    Motor test Notes    Front access  door    Closed Select Forward or Reverse   Closed Select Forward or Reverse     Not applicable   Remove all paper from the input source tray to avoid        hile performing this test  Select F  Not applicable sey S ile performing this test  Select Forward    Open    Top access  cover    Align Motor Test   Closed    Bottom Closed  cartridge    Top cartridge Closed    i    To run the motor tests     1  Close the top access cover and front access door    2  Enter MOTOR TESTS    3  Open the top access cover and front access door   activate the top right bellcrank by hand  close the  top access cover    4  Remove the toner cartridges if you plan to test for  any length of time    5  Run the desired motor tests    To finish     Open  Open    1  Open the top access cover   2  Deactivate the top right bellcrank    3  Close the top access cover and the front access  door        1  Select MOTOR TESTS from DIAGNOSTICS    2  Select the motor that you need to test  and press Select  Y      3  Select the direction if a choice is offered  Forward or Reverse   Press Select  QD    4  Press Stop      to end the test     Mirror Motor Test    1  Select
69.  printer  If the error message persists   Failure replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     990 xx Option Error Tray 2 failure  Replace 500 sheet assembly        2 18 Service Manual    5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages    User status and attendance messages    rs  3x through 8x attendance messages    31 Defective or Missing e Reseat the specified toner cartridge    lt color gt  Cartridge e For models C52x  Inspect the smart chip card contacts  A  for damage  contamination or  positioning error  If damaged  contact your next level of service     A    Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage contamination  Replace the toner  cartridge if defective     Inspect the JSBTN1 cable connection  Properly connect the cable if not connected  properly  Replace the cable if damaged     For models C52x  Replace the smart chip card  See    Smart chip card removal     models C52x only    on page 4 78     If the problem still exists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     32 Unsupported Check to see if the toner cartridge is a supported cartridge     Cartridge Note  Once the cartridge shipped with the printer is exhausted  it must be replaced by a  supply cartridge  refer to the User   s Guide for part numbers      If the specified toner cartridge is a supported cartridge  reseat the cartridge     For models C52x  Inspect the smart chip card contacts  A  for damage  contamination   or positioning error  If da
70.  quality and cause  jams or other paper handling problems    e Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 180  C   356   F  without releasing hazardous emissions    e Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer   Preprinting introduces semi liquid and volatile components into the printer    e Use grain long card stock when possible     Storing media    Use these media storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality     e For best results  store media where the temperature is 21  C  70  F  and the relative humidity is 40    e Store media in cartons when possible  on a pallet or shelf  rather than on the floor    e Store individual packages of media on a flat surface    e Do not store anything on top of individual media packages     Supported sizes    The following tables provide information on standard and optional sources for both input and output trays and    bins     mown i ff  weon i fo  pases fe  smse    wesson i fe  prawtesnom e  SEDES    7 3 4 Envelope 3 718x7 1 2  EEA    Media Sizes     lt     250 Tray   lt    500 Tray  Manual  P    SA elt PRG    Feed Slot    kh    S    S    148 x 210 to 215 9 x 355 6 mm  5 83 x 8 27 to 8 5 x 14 in        1 10 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Media Sizes  continued  Ari    N  B5 Envelope 176 x 250 mm o fw     J    Other Envelope    60 5 10 215 9 mm r ter  57 410 215 9 mm T     1 Lower feed reliability might be encountered 
71.  remove the left front mounting screw  C  and flip the right lock  D   back    Continue to hold the lever arm  A  up  and remove the right front mounting screw  E   release the lever arm   Remove the e clip  F     Slide the lever arm  A  and the spring  G  off the shaft    Warning  When removing the right rear mounting screw  be careful not to damage or remove the spring  that mounts over the screw     Remove the rear mounting screws  H    Remove the top cover camshaft assembly        4 86 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes     Warning  Do not install the camshaft assembly by reversing the removal procedures  The camshaft assembly  and EP drive assembly must be set to the closed and engaged positions respectively before the  camshaft assembly is installed  or the printer will not work correctly     1  Ensure the EP drive assembly is engaged by sliding the upper retraction plate  A  fully to the rear            N fi       y  t ne 4  is  inf f  Ea i      a       Remove the camshaft from the package  and place the left and right mounting brackets  B  on a flat  surface    Rotate the lever arm  C  all the way up as if the top access door were open  hold the lever arm  C  in place   and rotate the camshafts down  D  to the closed position    Release the lever arm  C     Remove the e clip  E       Slide the lever arm  C  and the spring  F  off the shaft     Aub oO N       Repair information 4 87    5022 xxx    T  Place the left side of the camshaft assembly through th
72.  remove the option and check the base printer for correct operation  If the base printer operates correctly  replace  the 500 sheet option assembly    Warning  Observe all necessary ESD precautions when removing and handling the system card or any  installed option cards or assemblies  See    Handling ESD sensitive parts    on page 4 1     CAUTION    When you see this symbol  there is a danger from hazardous voltage in the area of the product    where you are working  Unplug the product before you begin  or use caution if the product  must receive power in order to perform the task        Remove any input and output paper handling options from the printer     Check the AC line voltage  Go to step 2  Inform the customer   Is the line voltage correct     Is the AC line cord damaged  Replace the line cord     Go to step 3     Go to step 4     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Is the JLVPS1 cable correctly installed at Go to step 5  Reseat the JLVPS1 cable   JLVPS1 on the system card     Go to step 6  Replace the LVPS  See     Low voltage power  supply  LVPS  removal     on page 4 65     Turn the printer off  Disconnect the JLVPS1  cable from the system card  Turn the printer  on  and measure the voltage between the  JLVPS1 cable pin 1 and the JLVPS1 pin 14   black wire      Does this measure approximately  5 V dc     Check the system card for  5 V dc between  JLVPS1 pin 1 and ground   Is the voltage correct        Diagnostic information 2 
73.  self test  error  service check    on page 2 39    920 06 POST Error Input sensor not connected  See    920 06   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 40    920 07 POST Error Narrow media sensor not connected    See    920 07   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 40    920 08 POST Error Exit sensor not connected  See    920 08   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 40    920 09 12 POST Error One toner sensor not connected  See    920 09 12    POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 41    920 13 POST Error Cartridge motor 1  top  not connected    See    920 13    POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 43    920 14 POST Error Cartridge motor 2  bottom  not See    920 14   POST  power on self test  error   connected  service check    on page 2 44    920 15 POST Error Bad transfer belt NVRAM data  See    920 15   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 45    920 16 POST Error Bad printhead NVRAM data  See    920 16   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 45    920 17 POST Error Output bin cable not connected  See    920 17   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 46    920 18 POST Error Tray 2 has failed  See    920 18   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 46    920 19 POST Error Stepper motor not connected  See    920 19   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 46
74.  sensor at JBIN1 H   for network printers only  from the    system card   12  On the left side  unplug the connector  J  from CN1 on the high voltage power si  HVPS      F  d    Left  side       E H G F J    13  Lift and remove the top access cover assembly     Repair information 4 31    5022 xxx    Top access cover assembly removal   model C53x only    See    Top access cover assembly  network   C532n C534n    on page 7 3 or    Duplex top access assembly   network   C530dn C532dn C534dn    on page 7 3 for the part number     Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60    Remove the four screws  A  exposed after removing the fuser     ee    I  l    Sa  i eel    Wf i  Pa 4    We   j J  o         6  Remove the operator panel  See    Operator panel assembly removal    on page 4 23   T  Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15     4 32 Service Manual    5022 xxx    8  Remove the screw  B  exposed after removing the exit tray        9  If the top access door is open  close it   Warning  Ensure that top access door is closed before removing the linkage screw  Failing to close the    door leaves the linkage under a load  which may result in the linkage screw being catapulted away from the  printer when removed     Repair inform
75.  slot    Paper wrapped in fuser    Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    Damaged fuser autoconnect  Faulty fuser DC cable connection  Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error  service check    on page 2 32     Fan media  and stack flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in the paper tray     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     Load paper in the manual feed slot  See    Paper  jams in the multipurpose feeder or manual  feeder    on page 3 28     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52        Diagnostic information 2 9    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     moe  Omen Bn    201 10    201 21  201 23    201 24    202 02  202 12    202 13    2 10 Service Manual    Input se
76.  stack it flat in the tray or MPF   e Incorrect paper loading l  l l   If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  e Paper pick mechanism failure to    148 xx   MPF motor error service check     e System card on page 2 37     242 03 While feeding from tray 2  the input Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  sensor does not break  used   Possible causes  Fan media  and stack flat in 500 sheet tray    l  tray 2    e Incorrect media setting   ae  Properly set media restraints in tray 2   e Incorrect paper loading l l    i l Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  e Incorrect media restraint setting worn   e 500 sheet assembly failure Replace the 500 sheet assembly   e Paper pick mechanism If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  to    140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error  service check    on page 2 32   242 04 While feeding from tray 2  the input Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  sensor is made while the previous used   page is still in the aligner  Fan media  and stack it flat in the 500 sheet tray  Possible causes   tray 2    e Incorrect media setting Properly set media restraints in tray 2     Incorrect paper loading Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  Incorrect media restraint setting oe  l Replace the 500 sheet assembly   500 sheet assembly failure l l l  l l If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  Paper pick mechanism to    140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error  service check    on page 2 32
77.  tendency for media to curl at its edges  Excessive curl can cause media feeding problems  Curl can  occur after the media passes through the printer  where it is exposed to high temperatures  Storing media  unwrapped in hot  humid  cold  or dry conditions  even in the trays  can contribute to media curling prior to  printing and can cause feeding problems     Smoothness    Media smoothness directly affects print quality  If media is too rough  toner cannot fuse to it properly  If media is  too smooth  it can cause media feeding or print quality issues  Always use media between 100 and 300 Sheffield  points  however  smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality     Moisture content    The amount of moisture in media affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the media  correctly  Leave media in its original wrapper until it is time to use it  This limits the exposure of media to moisture  changes that can degrade its performance     Condition media before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24  to 48 hours before printing  Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very  different from the printer environment  Thick media may also require a longer conditioning period     Grain direction    Grain refers to the alignment of the media fibers in a sheet of media  Grain is either grain long  running the  length of the media  or grain sho
78.  the high voltage power    supply connector at JHVPS1  F   and the bin full sensor at JBIN1 G   and USB at J1  H   model C534 only   from the system card                  an Ere Taig  En inim                  ar W F    T RE  i     E    Lk py       D G F E H       Repair information 4 35    5022 xxx    13  Disconnect the ground cable  J      al       14  Lift and remove the top access cover assembly     4 36 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Bin full sensor removal   models C52x    See    Bin full sensor with cable  C520n C522n C524n C524dn    on page 7 3 for the part number     Open the top access door    Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60   Disconnect the spring  A     Remove the seven screws  B  securing the inner access cover     oe       B A B  5  Remove the inner access cover   6  Turn the access cover over  and press the back of the sensor to snap sensor  C  from the bracket                 N       ae     j       z F  4 ee AA  _     Se oe       as               T  Remove the sensor and cable     Repair information 4 37    5022 xxx    Bin full sensor removal   models C53x    See    Bin full sensor with cable  C53x    on page 7 3 for the part number     1  Remove the top access cover assembly  See    Top access cover assembly removal   model C53x only     on page 4 32   2  Remove the three screws  A  from the cable cover        A       4  Remove the bin full sensor and cable     4 38 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Bump aligner gear removal    See the Bump a
79.  the paper tray   2  Push up and back to relase the bump aligner spring        3  Lower the bump aligner spring to remove it        4 42 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Remove the bump aligner roller               Repair information 4 43    5022 xxx    Contact springs removal    See    Contact springs    on page 7 17 for the part number     1  Remove all the toner cartridges   2  Remove the screw  A  and the spring cap  B  of the appropriate contact spring        A B    3  Press the lower half  C  D  of the springs and remove the springs     N A  a    Mis       4 44 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes  When installing  make sure the top half  E  of the spring is under the straight spring  F   This  is typical for both types of springs  Also make sure the bottom half  D G  of both springs are compressed and  locked by the appropriate locking tabs  H  1      F E       Repair information 4 45    5022 xxx    Deflector assembly removal   models C53x only    See    Deflector assembly  C53x    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   2  Remove the screw  A  securing the deflector assembly on the right side     CA pe       3  Place a flathead screwdriver between the deflector assembly and the right side frame  and lever the  deflector away from the frame        a  p g            4  Pivot the deflector out  and remove     4 46 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes     1  Align the two studs  A 
80.  to return to EVENT LOG   EXIT DIAGNOSTICS    Press Select to exit DIAGNOSTICS  The printer performs a power on reset and returns to normal mode     Diagnostic aids 3 19    5022 xxx    Configuration menu  CONFIG MENU     Available tests    The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown for models C53x  The order differs slightly in models  C5ex     Configuration menu  Reset Fuser Cnt See    Reset Fuser Cnt    on page 3 21     Color Lock Out see    Color Lock Out    on page 3 21    For models C52x  Black Only Mode     Jobs on Disk  if hard disk is installed     Disk Encryption  if hard disk is See    Disk Encryption    on page 3 25   installed   Duplex Gloss See    Duplex Gloss    on page 3 25     Font Sharpening See    Font Sharpening    on page 3 26   Exit Config Menu This selection exits Configuration Menu  and Resetting the    Printer displays  The printer performs a POR and returns to normal  mode        3 20 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Reset Fuser Cnt    Resets the fuser count value to zero  The Event Log records each time that a user executes the Reset Fuser  Count operation  See    Event Log    on page 3 23 for more information  This setting only appears if the  Maintenance Warning and Intervention function is enabled in the printer Configuration ID     To reset the fuser count     1  Select Reset Fuser Cnt from the CONFIG MENU   2  Press YY    3  Press Q  to select Reset   Resetting Fuser Count Value appears   4  Select Motor Calibration  See    Motor Ca
81.  to the two alignment holes  B  in the left side frame        B A  2  Align the stud  C  with the alignment hole  D  on the right frame                  uae        pi  i   ii afinar  pi T a ee  t              w     i    3  Snap into place   4  Replace the screw on the right side     Repair information 4 47    5022 xxx    Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly removal   model C52x only    See i   or for the part number     Remove the low voltage power supply  See   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove all the toner cartridges    Disconnect the JTRANS2 connector  A  from the system card     Se       A       4 48 Service Manual    5022 xxx    T  Remove the six inner screws  D            D D    8  Remove the nine outer screws  E    Note  Access the top two screws through the top cover        9  Remove the EP drive assembly from the printer     Repair information 4 49    5022 xxx    Installation note  Ensure that the top access door is open and EP drive is retracted when installing the new EP  drive assembly     Note  When retracted  the upper  F  and lower retraction plates  G  will be fully forward  If not  slide the upper  retraction plate forward until the EP drive retracts and is disengaged from the developers           4 50 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly removal   model C53x only    See    EP drive assembly  C53x    on page 7 7 for the part number     Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on 
82.  transfer belt and corrects any media skew as it comes  out of the paper trays or MPF     Transfer belt    The transfer rolls  located inside the transfer belt unit  are an integral part of the electrophotographic process   and the transfer belt advances the print media through the printer     Fuser    The fuser bonds toner to the print media and advances the print media through the last portion of the paper  path  The paper exit sensor is also located in the fuser  and a flag is present on all fusers that activates the bin  full sensors on network model printers     Duplex    Duplex capability is present only on the C524dn or C524dtn model printers  The duplex function is built into the  front access door and uses a two pass method for rerouting the paper down and back through the paper path for  a second time  To accomplish the two pass method  the paper is fed partially out of the printer and is then  reversed back into the printer     3 32 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Print media transport    The print media is picked from the input source and fed to the bump aligner roll  The media movement is  detected by a sensor located in the paper pick mechanism  It does not matter where the media comes from  Tray  1  Tray 2  or  the MPF   it will enter the electrophotographic process at the bump aligner drive  The bump aligner  motor drives the bump aligner roll which feeds the paper to the transfer belt     pick tire    Pick tire Backup aligner roll                               
83. 0   PPDS Emulation    Activates or deactivates the Personal Printer Data Stream  PPDS  emulation language  This menu item only  appears if the PPDS interpreter is available     Download Emuls    Lets the system support person turn the download emulator off  This menu item only appears if one download  emulator is installed     The only selection is Disable  An Enable value is unnecessary because the printer automatically re enables all  download emulators after two instances of a power on reset for the printer  To re enable these emulators  a user  would perform another power on reset after exiting the CONFIG MENU     Demo Mode    Lets marketing personnel or merchandisers demonstrate the printer to potential customers by printing the demo  page     Selections include Deactivate  default  and Activate  Select Deactivate to turn Demo Mode off  or select Activate  to turn Demo Mode on     Factory Defaults    Sets the majority of printer values back to their factory default settings     Warning  This selection cannot be reversed  so this operation should only be used as a last resort to fix any  printer problem  When factory default settings are restored     e All downloaded resources  fonts  macros  symbol sets  in the printer memory  RAM  are deleted   e All menu settings return to the factory default setting except       The Display Language setting in the    Setup    Menu       All settings in the Parallel Menu  Serial Menu  Network Menu  Infrared Menu  LocalTalk Menu  and  U
84. 4  Print the Quick Test page  and repeat this process until the bottom margin is adjusted        Bottom margin alignment marks    Repair information 4 7    5022 xxx    Left Margin    1     Select Left Margin  and press Select     2  Adjust the left margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page     3        Engine XX XX XXXX X Magenta Left Margin  x T    Font X XXXXX XX X Magenta Right Margin  x  Magent Skew  x       magenta Bow  x  Dup Top Margin  x    Paper Source   Tray 1                 Formatted Size   XXXXXX        t    5S    e Pressing the left arrow decreases the value and moves the left alignment marks to the left   e Pressing the right arrow increases the value and moves the left alignment marks to the right   Press Select   Y    to save the value           4  Print the Quick Test page  and check the left alignment marks each time until you are satisfied     Right Margin    1     Select Right Margin  and press Select     Engine XX XX XXXX X Magenta Left Margin  x T    Font X XXXXX XX X Magenta Right Margin  x  Magent Skew  x  magenta Bow  x  Dup Top Margin  X          Paper Source   Tray 1  Formatted Size   XXXXXX             A    Adjust the right margin until the points of the left alignment marks touch the edge of the page   e Pressing the left arrow decreases the value and moves the right alignment marks to the right   e Pressing the right arrow increases the value and moves the right alignment marks to the left   Press Select   Y 
85. 5 11 for  the location of JTIRANS1     Is the cable damaged     Replace the transfer belt assembly  See     Transfer belt removal    on page 4 91     Does the error clear     Models C53x only    Replace the front door  assembly  See    Front door  assembly removal    on  page 4 55     Problem solved     Go to step 2     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JTRANS2 for proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any other damage  See    Connector listing     models C53x    on page 5 19 for the location  of JTRANS2     Is the cable damaged    Replace the transfer belt assembly  See     Transfer belt removal    on page 4 91   Does the error clear     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JPH1  large printhead  cable  for proper connection to the system  card  the cable for pinch points  and the cable  or connector for any other damage     Is the cable damaged    Replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79    Does the error clear     Replace the front door  assembly See    Front door  assembly removal    on  page 4 55     Problem solved     Replace the printhead  See     Printhead removal    on  page 4 74     Problem solved     Go to step 2     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Go to step 2     Replace the printhead  See    
86. 5 millimeter movement of the  top edge print alignment marks     Straight Skewed       s o ed      n    10  When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even on the page  tighten the  printhead mounting screws in the following order  Top middle  lower left  and lower right   11  Reinstall the paper exit tray and the fuser cable cover  Replace the covers     4 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Registration  black   Top Margin    1  Select Quick Test  REGISTRATION in the Diagnostics mode   or use the last Quick Test you used to  adjust skew     Top left alignment marks Top right alignment marks       Lexmark C524  Quick Test    2  Select Top Margin  and press Select    3  Adjust the values until both top alignment marks are on the top edge of the print   e Increasing the value  right arrow  moves the alignment marks down on the print   e Decreasing moves them up    4  Press Select        to save the value     5  Print the Quick Test page  and check the top alignment marks  Repeat adjustment of the top margin and  printing of the Quick Test page until top margin is set     Bottom Margin    1  Select Bottom Margin  and press Select   2  Adjust the bottom margin until the points of the bottom margin alignment marks are visible and touching  the edge of the paper   e Increasing the value  right arrow  moves the alignment marks up on the page   e Decreasing the value  left arrow  moves the marks down on the page   3  Press Select        to save the value   
87. 5022 xxx    910 01   Transparency sensor error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the paper pick Go to step 2   Check the connector JTRAY1 for proper mechanism  See    Paper   connection to the system card  the cable for pick mechanism assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal    on page 4 68    any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Check the transparency sensor for correct Go to step 3  Remove the paper pick  mounting  mechanism  properly install  the transparency sensor  and reinstall paper pick  mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly  removal    on page 4 68     Is the transparency sensor properly mounted  in the paper pick mechanism     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     920 01   POST  power on self test  error service check    Replace the bump aligner motor  See    Bump Problem solved  Replace the system card   aligner motor removal    on page 4 40  See    System card   removal    on page 4 79   Does the error clear        920 02   POST  power on self test  error service check    Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        920 03   POST  power on self 
88. 51    5022 xxx    Turn the printer off  Connect the JLVPS1 cable   Replace the faulty part  Contact your next level of  to the system card  Remove one option feature support    at a time  and turn the printer on to isolate the   failing part     Warning  Observe all the ESD precautions   see    Handling ESD sensitive parts    on  page 4 1  and turn the printer off before any  feature or option cards are removed or  replaced     Is a failing part found        Exit sensor service check    Verify the paper is loaded properly in the Go to step 2  Load paper in the manual  manual feed slot  See    Loading media in the feed slot  See    Clearing  multipurpose feeder or manual feeder    on paper jams in the manual  page 3 28  feeder    on page 3 29     Is the paper properly loaded in the manual  feed slot     Is the exit sensor flag damaged  Replace the fuser  See Go to step 3      Fuser removal    on  page 4 60     Is the JFUSER1 properly connected to the Go to step 4  Reseat the connector   system card     Place a voltmeter between the JFUSER1 pin 7   Replace the system card  Replace the exit sensor   and ground  Initially  the meter should indicate   See    System card  5 V dc  Activate the exit sensor flag  removal    on page 4 79     Does the voltage drop to 0 V dc        Input sensor service check    Is the input sensor flag damaged  Replace the paper pick Go to step 2   mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly  removal    on page 4 68     Is the JTRAY cable connector 
89. 6 Service Manual    CRU and FRUs    Fuser    Top access door                      Toner cartridges    r         a  Pa  ea    a       Front access  door    Transfer belt    Waste toner   assembly        Left side of printer                   550 sheet assembly     C53x     500 sheet assembly     C52x        5022 xxx    Locations and connectors 5 7    5022 xxx    Sensors    Paper exit duplex  entry sensor and flag          Input bin full  sensor and    flag    Multifunction transparancy Input sensor  sensor    Toner level sensor    Toner patch sensor  TPS     _    a    k Eg    CC  k ESN      5 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Motors    Transfer belt  motor    Top cartridge  motor    Bottom  cartridge motor    Bump aligner  motor       Duplex motor  duplex models only     Locations and connectors 5 9    5022 xxx    Printer cards        Smart  chip card   C52X only     High voltage  power supply    System card    5 10 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Connectors    System card  network    models C52x                         Jo                                                                                                                                                         FJJCARTI  j                    STRANS2        F   JCART2         JDUPLX1     1  OO Qa eI IO  o o oo  4 OO          JTRAY2    JTRAY1 p    fe JTRANS1      JOPT   de             JUSB1    ol                         AO   4    JDC2                                                                      sump    Locations a
90. 666 in  or 0 1693 mm       10 to  10 Each increment  corresponds to an approximate shift  of 4 pels at 600 dpi     Each increment corresponds to  1 1200 of an inch     A positive offset moves text up the  page and widens the bottom  margin  while a negative offset  moves text down the page and  narrows the bottom margin     A positive change moves the image  down the page and increases the  top margin  A negative change  moves the image up and decreases  the top margin     A positive change moves the image  to the left  and a negative change  moves the image to the right  No  compression occurs     A positive change moves the image  to the right  and a negative change  moves the image to the left     A positive value causes the right  end of the scan line to move down  the page  A negative value causes  the right end of the scan line to  move up the page  The left end  Stays fixed        5022 xxx    5  Continue changing the settings by repeating steps 2 through 4   6  Print another copy of the Quick Test to verify your changes     7  To exit REGISTRATION  press Back         Skew    One printhead houses the four color planes  The black plane is aligned to the printer  and the color planes are  internally aligned to black  Electronic alignment fine tunes the alignment of the color planes to the black plane  once the printhead is installed  See    Printhead mechanical alignment    on page 4 3 for instructions on setting  printhead alignment  This must be performed before color s
91. ART2  C   and JTRANS2  D  connectors from the drive assembly      0  j   j  F  k i     _    3       lt a     E i r  F i  k 5    4  i  j  j r ja  f     f  1 j  amp     ka     a x       Repair information 4 51    5022 xxx    7  Remove the nine outer screws  E    Note  Access the top two screws through the top cover        8  Remove the EP drive assembly from the printer     4 52 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation note  Ensure that the top access door is open and the EP drive is retracted when installing the new  EP drive assembly     Note  When retracted  upper  F  and lower retraction plates  G  will be fully forward  If not  slide the upper  retraction plate forward until the EP drive retracts and is disengaged from the developers        Repair information 4 53    5022 xxx    Front access door 5 V interlock switch removal    See    Front door 5 V interlock switch    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the LVPS  See    Low voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    on page 4 65   2  Disconnect the JINT1 connector  A  from the system card        3  Open the top access door   4  Remove the gearbox shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   5  Remove the interlock switch mounting screw  B  from the right side of the printer        B    6  Remove the cable from cable guide  and remove the 5 V interlock switch     4 54 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Front door assembly removal    See the part number for the Front door assembly for the specific model you ne
92. Cyan  L value R value    P 0       M M    Current New  Cyan Cyan  P value P value       Repeat steps 2 through 11 for yellow and magenta     Right  R     i Adjustment  i    R 0     Right  R  Fine Adjustment    54  Coarse      300 0 300    240    42    30                        0    T    New  Cyan  R value    Note  Start each color group by setting the Top Margin  Left Margin  Right Margin  Bottom Margin  Skew     and Bow to zero     4 12 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Printer removal procedures    Precautions to take before maintenance work    Do not implement any operation  removal  or modification and so on  which is not presented in this manual     1  Turn the printer power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet prior to starting  AN removals or checks        2  Prior to starting any repairs  read and understand the warnings in this manual   e High temperature  e High voltage  e Laser radiation  Confirm the direction of all parts and screw lengths during removal replacement   Utilize the proper cleaning procedures solvents during maintenance   Confirm that all parts and covers are properly installed and assembled prior to starting the print test     ae    Repair information 4 13    5022 xxx    Cover removals  Outer bezel  C52X     Bezel  C53X               Inner bezel  C52X     Operator Panel   C52X        Exit tray  cover Rear  cover    Top access cover  assembly    Front access cover    Paper tray dust cover   with spring     4 14 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Exi
93. HVPS doctor developer contact spring  8     Parts catalog 7 17    5022 xxx    Assembly 9  Cable parts packet       7 18 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 9  Cable parts packet    Units    Units  Descriotion  mach   FRU p       40X1430 Cables  C52x  including  A   Cartridge motor cable  1   B   Fuser AC cable  1   C   Fuser DC cable  1   D   Smart chip cable  1   E   Option cable  1   Fuser cable cover  1   see   Front    on page 7 4 for part identification  and location   e Duplex cable  1   40X3598 Cables  C53x  including  A   Cartridge motor cable  1   B   Fuser AC cable  1   C   Fuser DC cable  1   E   Option cable  1   F   Transport motor cable  1   Fuser cable cover  1   see   Front       on page 7 4 for part identification  and location   Duplex cable  1     Parts catalog 7 19    5022 xxx    Assembly 10  Miscellaneous    Units    Units  Deecintion  mach   FRU p    40X1431    40X1508  40X1509  40X1510  40X1454  40X1455  40X1515  40X1514  40X1513  40X1512  40X2664  40X4237  40X4199  40X4239  40X2663  40X4238  40X1375  40X1376  40X1377  40X1378    40X1562    40X0291    40X0290  40X2610  7377018  7377200    7 20 Service Manual    a a a ee    a Sa ee    Parts packet  screw  contains one of each screw used in the printer  with  the exception of the parts specifically called out      128 MB SDRAM  100 pin   256 MB SDRAM  100 pin   512 MB SDRAM  100 pin   32 MB flash card   64 MB flash card   Korean font card   Traditional Chinese font card   Simplified Chinese font card  
94. If a source is selected that contains envelopes  an envelope test pattern is printed  If Continuous is  selected  the test pattern is printed only on the first envelope     Note  The Print Test Page always prints on one side of the paper  regardless of the duplex setting   4  Press Back      to return to PRINT TESTS     Print quality test pages  Prt Quality Pgs     The print quality test consists of five pages  Pages one and two contain a mixture of graphics and text  The  remainder of the pages only contain graphics  The test prints on the media in the default tray     Lexmark C534  Print Quality Test       Fa       i a    Badia AT aE          This test may be printed from either Configuration Menu or the Diagnostics mode  To run the print quality pages  from the Diagnostics mode  select PRINT TESTS and Print Quality Pgs from the menu  Once the test is  started  it cannot be canceled  When the test pages print  the printer returns to the original screen     To run the Print Quality Test Pages  select Prt Quality Pgs from PRINT TESTS  The message Printing  Quality Test Pages is displayed     3 10 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Hardware Tests    Panel Test    This test verifies the operator panel LCD function   To run the Panel Test     1  Select HARDWARE TESTS from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Panel Test    The Panel Test continually executes   3  Press Stop      to cancel the test     Button Test    This test verifies the operator panel button function   To run the Button Test    
95. Interlock switch  fs  a a a    Wi ri n D   a ram for HVPS  fuser motor  and bump align motor  HAEAEGHE  Senses front door and top cover   Printhead  Thermistor Fe  Exit ol lo  sensor f 5  Bin full sensor Lt   imi       5V Interlock  for laser driver  Switch  Autoconnect T  GND a  Fuser CRU Yellow cartridge   ata 2    n Z a        92525  GND zla z z  z 5    Cyan cartridge   om iE o gt  aaa  mjin PIE  Jol gt lol lel al S  e  a n aja He OC    oo  oo  O   oi  5 5 SIS   UCT aja  ioe  7 GND r7  TIE ol Hil 22o   Magenta cartridge   bara y a z z  52    z 2 2  12  Z s1579 Hihshish7H912123  9  F GND 2  fam 2   r D  Black cartridge   5 sl  ae cc x    x x  j j EE T l oza       T 2  7  Sir o o  Cartridge drive Fl z zjx olol o o al H Siz Z  El z e olz u T ZIN lalol ZI Elov wl a     aa 3 clo  gt  gt   izlZ ra      gt  OFF 18 oc     AAA E IE AMPAR RIEKIE      99  motor 1 z a8   39 EE B SREE as E E gasi  e SIS  FP  SEs blaska elkasiga 3 3 ll  SS oc  H   el OIS Slafar or e O79      El     Zl jE  gza   olol Jojo    la Sisir Salz gas sa Ssa  lolol lolo siga  u   wz zu gaap wuulelelelole  SAAS Saz olll AsO  Jala  AA R R Err N RA a OA LAAT yi  R aa  zS  g gael ald Vols ISIS 1S LIE ES E s  s5 s 2 5 al len oile BSR S  gt   gt  9  gt   gt  9   2 8 8 18 1818  ale sfololSiz  8 81 8 8 iz  S18  8     gt   ea    2 w  cal al 2 2  cl solo   gt lo  SEPEISIRIRR lxx  SESS SSS SASL lalallala SS aS SSi eal SjalSiSlS SialS S GlalalGlalals  gt  9 Slals  124  6 sfop2apafiepsj2oj22i24   1  2 3 4 5  iy2ysi4tstey7    
96. L_U  CART2_ HALL _W  Ground    JCART2       O    V_CART2_WIND_V  V_24V_CVR  COVER_OPEN_SNS  VS_DUPLX   5 V   DUPLEX_PWM  DUPLEX_ENC  Ground   V_24VD   Ground   FAN_FG   Ground    24VC   FAN1_PWM    JCVR1    JDUPLX1       l    Z       O    JFAN1           0    5022 xxx    CART1_ HALL V  CART1_FG    5V SW  V_CART1_WIND_U  V_CART1_WIND_W  CART2_HALL V  CART2_ FG    5V SW  V_CART2_WIND_U  V_CART2_WIND_W    Locations and connectors 5 19    Connector listing   models C53x   see    System card  network    models C53x    on page 5 18   continued     Connector    JFUSER1 V_FUSER_M   VS_FUSER_LED  Ground  FUSER_EXIT_SNSD  FUSER _HR_SNS  Ground  HV_EMPTY_C  HV_EMPTY_Y  Ground   TONER_C  TONER_Y  HV_CHRG_PWM  HV_XFER_PWM_C  HV _XFER_PWM_M  HV _XFER_PWM_Y  CORE_CURR_SNSD  HV _XFER_PWM_K  VS_JINT 1   5V_SW   Ground   VS_INT   5V_PH    5 Vdc    5 Vdc   LVPS ZERO_XING   24 V dc   Ground   Ground   Ground   LVPS_ BRON  MM_REF   MM_LOCK  MM_START   Ground    24 V dc   VS_JOPT 1   5V_SW   S_OPT_ENC  Ground    24VC   OPT_PLEV    V_FUSER_M    S_ FUSER_ENC  GND BR_THERM  VS_FUSER 5V  FUSER _HR_THM_RTN  V_24VD   HV _EMPTY_M  HV_ENPTY_K   5V SW  TONER_M  TONER_K  TONER_CHK  XFER_SERVO_C  XFER_SERVO_M  XFER_SERVO_Y  HVPS_ID  XFER_SERVO K    10  JHVPS1    10  12  14  16  18  20  22  24           1  13  15  17  19  2   23  JINT1    JLVPS1  5 V dc   5 V dc   24 V dc   24 V dc  Ground  Ground  Ground    LVPS_HRON    10  12  14  16    13  15    JMIRR1    JOPT1    NO    SERIAL_TRANSMIT  OPT_TYPE   Ground  
97. Lpetsl4ispel7 sfofopiipahishap sieht 7s  9j2of2 y22 23 24 25f26 2 7 28 29 30 31 32 33 34435 36  il2lsl4islel ls  Uls  719  Gelso hti  Oles  Gllslalisier    Lpelsl4ispel7 sfofopipahishapspieh 7st oj2of2 y22 23 24 25f26 2 7 28 29 30 31132 33 34435  36  i  in  el4lelsho    tm  eh 4 6 8hopahahefisj2oj2aie      A JPH1 etre J1  JFAN1 JSBTN1 AAT 2 ara   Z  JOPP1     7  L    LVPS_BRON Jrz LPS HRON E ENG LJ  E eno a aa i  coooooooonon S  11 12 11 12 O  m eno tA   i ja oooog Pen  7 aw A RRIJLVPSI OO no in eek ic   tvs zeno Xna   aw 8   E OO a   ev aie EE OHoOooooo0ood  A 5V E T g    Transport SA a Oe F4 oo OOOO 0g O ne   motor V_CART1_WIND_V V_CART1_WIND_W O   LILI IC   V_CART1_WIND_U F O IO OI   C   CARTI HALL W CART1_FG 5 Gg gogogaga    CART1_HALL_U CART1_HALL_V oe  ca   Duplex Assembly  0  MOOOOOOOO  Duplex V_Trans_PHB  Ss                                        M  V_Trans_PHB            driver  card    O O                Encoder       Cartridge drive  motor 2         V_CART2_WIND_W  V_CART2_WIND_U                                 CART2_FG  CART2_HALL_V                         _                   J800       oak           DUPLEX_ENC  DUPLEX_PWM                                    TRAY_NMT  3 3V                                                                                            PHU UL                                                                                                                                                                                                        
98. P Defaults 3 17   factory defaults 3 22    Index l 1    5022 xxx    deflector assembly  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 46  Demo Mode 3 22  diagnostic aids 3 1  diagnostics menu  accessing 3 1  ALIGNMENT 3 7  available tests 3 2  Base Sensor Test  Bin Full Test 3 15  Sensor Test 3 15  Duplex Tests  Motor Test 3 14  Print Test  duplex  3 13  Quick Test 3 12  Top Margin 3 14  Event Log  Clear Log 3 19  Display Log 3 18  Print Log 3 18  exit diagnostics 3 19  Hardware Tests  Button Test 3 11  CACHE Test 3 12  DRAM Test 3 11  Panel Test 3 11  Input Tray Tests 3 14  Motor Tests  Align Motor Test 3 8  Bottom cartridge 3 8  Fuser 3 8  Mirror Motor Test 3 8  Motor Calibration 3 9  Servo Laser Test 3 9  Top cartridge 3 8  Transfer 3 8  Tray 1 3 8  Tray 2 3 8  Print Tests  input source tests 3 9  Prt Quality Pgs 3 10  Printer Setup  Configuration ID 3 16  DC Charge Adjust 3 17  Defaults 3 16  Dev Bias Adj 3 17  Engine Setting 1 4 3 16  EP Defaults 3 17  Fuser Temp 3 17  Model Name 3 16  Page Counts 3 16  Serial Number 3 16  Transfer Adjust 3 17  REGISTRATION 3 4  Bottom Margin 3 4  Left Margin 3 4  Quick Test 3 6    l 2 Service Manual    Right Margin 3 4  Skew 3 5  Top Margin 3 4  dimensions 1 5  Disk Encryption 3 25  DRAM Test 3 11  duplex  Motor Test 3 14  Print Test 3 13  Quick Test 3 12  theory 3 41  Top Margin 3 14  Duplex Gloss 3 25    E  electrical interlock 3 54  24 V interlock switch 3 55  5 V interlock switch 3 54  electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly  locations 5 3  parts ca
99. SB Menu     Selections are Restore Base and Restore Network  The Restore Network value only appears on printer models  that have integrated network support     Restoring Factory Defaults appears on the operator panel while factory defaults are restored     3 22 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Energy Conserve    Affects the values that appear in the Power Saver menu item in the Setup Menu  This menu item only appears  when the printer model does not support Automatic Power Saver or has deactivated Automatic Power Saver   The menu item only affects the values that are displayed in the Power Saver menu item     Select Off  default  to cause Power Saver to only display Disabled  If Disabled is selected in Power Saver  the  printer deactivates the Power Saver feature  Select On to cause Disabled to not appear on the operator panel for  Power Saver     Event Log    Lets the system support person print a limited set of the information contained in the Diagnostics mode version  of the printed Event Log  For a sample of a printout  see    Event Log    on page 3 18  The limited Configuration  log and the full Diagnostics log printed versions show the same operator panel messages when they print and  follow the same layout guidelines     To print the event log     1  Select EVENT LOG from the Config Menu   2  Select Print Log   3  Press Select to begin printing the log     Auto Align Adj    Controls whether the printer executes the automatic alignment calibration after an initiating event
100. See    Operator See    System card  the voltage on pin 6 and ground  panel assembly removal    removal    on page 4 79     on page 4 23  If this does  not fix the problem  replace  the top cover access  assembly  See    Top access  cover assembly removal     model C52x only    on   page 4 28 or    Top access  cover assembly removal     model C53x only    on   page 4 32     Does the voltage measure approximately   3 3 V dc        Operator panel display blank  five beeps  and LED off    Service tip  The printer has detected a problem with the system card  the operator panel assembly cable  part of  the top cover access assembly   or the operator panel assembly if POST does not complete  The printer emits    five beeps  and sticks in a continuous pattern until the printer is turned off     Is the operator panel assembly cable properly Go to step 2  Reinstall the cable   installed at system card JOPP1 and at the    operator panel assembly     Measure the voltage between JOPP1 pin 2 Go to step 3  Replace the system card   and ground on the system card  See    System card  Is the voltage approximately  5 V dc  Pow A OW BOGE ety     Check continuity of the operator panel Replace the operator panel Replace the top cover  assembly cable  assembly  See    Operator access assembly  See    Top  a panel assembly removal    access cover assembly   Is there continuity  on page 4 23  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on
101. Smart chip card or printhead NVRAM   POR the printer     Failure failure  e For C52x  if the error message persists  replace    the smart chip card  See    Smart chip card  removal   models C52x only    on page 4 78     e For C53x  if the error message persists  replace  the printhead  See    Printhead removal    on  page 4 74     952 01 952 99 NV CRC error has occurred  This is Perform a POR to clear the error   Failure n recoverable     953 01 953 99 NVRAM   Operator panel assembly NVRAM  POR the printer  Replace operator panel assembly if  Failure the error message persists  See    Operator panel          assembly removal    on page 4 23     Diagnostic information 2 17    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     954 01 954 99 NVRAM   System card NVRAM failure  POR the printer  If the error message persists   Failure replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     955 01 955 99 Code System board memory failure  POR the printer  If the error message persists   Failure replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     956 01   956 99 System Processor failure  POR the printer  If the error message persists   card replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     958 01   958 99 Memory   Processor failure  POR the printer  If the error message persists   Failure replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     961 01 961 99 Memory   Memory failure  POR the
102. a  jojo  gt    gt       DL Lu  Lu FIE Ole aelo 2la    ejoj    jawu u  O  u  32 plr Za 5 E   Hel   ul    GND  i he ales ai  Magenta cartridge   aT z 2 2 2 Z 2 8    yn  Zz  GND o S a  i oc  Black cartridge   bara a zg 3 a r       JES x x  mamncge ONNE Bla z S   E  slala leelo El lalage  1         zo   T Mt   lz   yO  x sft    aft    19 2 83  2  2 S Zlzle ral a bed dd ult      st  motor   EIS OJ   alg  ulol lt  ef Jel elox ho    al el Dal2 2 al Ballz  a  Eladio eleloo  lt 5 ae    Alo sic  OS lll HSI  Jol z IB  sizal  S QI  lolol   ara a  S Olr lq  S  Ale   a a T S aq a  ola  jae  Z olo  a gt   S   elo  aalo aai Eesel gSISlo SSS jojo  Hatol elol ollesssa  T wa d zZ 5 Z Zz Zz Zz Zz    2 ay s 8  sis Tle  SISSIES  SSIS  SSSss SlalalGlalal z S S S S T S SIL T PJalalSiz S SiSiSyiz SiLlSlalal Glal als                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        TPB sis  CEECEE ss  72h spe gfe 23 HBanBEou  JFAN1 JSBTN1 EVR z eee Zo E JOPPI JPH1    JFUSER1    JHVPS1 2 a J   gt  or  Main Fan FO m O            lt      LVPS_BRON LVPS_HRON Tell  GND GND     14  Sb ono     2a aw   JLVPS1 A 
103. age and  continue printing     The job may not print correctly   Cancel the current job     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Install different flash memory before downloading any resources to flash     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted   Delete fonts  macros  and other data stored in flash memory   Install a larger capacity flash memory card     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Format the flash memory before storing any resources on it  If the error message  remains  replace the flash memory     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79   Make sure the serial link is set up correctly and the appropriate cable is in use     Make sure the serial interface parameters  protocol  baud  parity  and data bits  are set  correctly on the printer and host computer     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message an
104. and left arrow keys to zero out all settings  Press Select  after you zero out each setting     Note  Itis important to zero out all settings to make the adjustment easier     Scroll to Quick Test in the same color menu  Press Select  two pages print    On the pages  make sure all the Current Values are set to zero  If not  go back two steps and repeat   Look at the coarse and fine adjustments on the top left of the page  and enter the best number for the top  adjustment in the T space  Transfer this number over to the computation area for Z    On the operator panel  use A and W to locate Top Margin  Press Select  and then use  lt  or P gt  to enter  the setting computed for T  Press Select to save    Repeat this process for skew  Z   Add the T value and the current Z value to obtain the new skew  Z  value   Reprint the Quick Test page  and observe the results  Make additional adjustments if necessary before  proceeding on to Quick Test step two page    Obtain left  L   right  R   and Bow  P  value using the same method as obtaining T from Quick Test Step 1   Reprint the Quick Test to ensure the settings are correct  Make additional adjustments as required    Press Back      to return to ALIGNMENT     See    Printhead mechanical alignment    on page 4 3 for printout samples and additional information     Diagnostic aids 3 7    5022 xxx    Motor tests  The motor tests are run primarily to locate noises in the printer   General motor tests    In some instances  when you enter a
105. assembly  network   C520n C522n C524n C524dn    on page 7 3 or    Top access  cover assembly  non network   C524    on page 7 3 for the part number     Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60    Remove the four screws  A  exposed after removing the fuser     MANT       5  Remove the operator panel  See    Operator panel assembly removal    on page 4 23   6  Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15     4 28 Service Manual    5022 xxx    7  Remove the screw  B  exposed after removing the exit tray        8  If the top access door is open  close it   Warning  Ensure that the top access door is closed before removing the linkage screw  Failing to close the    door leaves the linkage under a load  which may result in the linkage screw being catapulted away from the  printer when removed     Repair information 4 29    5022 xxx    9  Remove the linkage screw  C         4 30 Service Manual    5022 xxx    10  Remove the screw  D  from the rear           D    11  Disconnect the cables for the fan at JFAN1  E   the operator panel at JOPP1  F   the high voltage power  supply connector at JHVPS1  G   and the bin full sensor at JBIN1 H   for network printers only  from the    system card   12  On the left side  unplug the connector  J  from CN1 on the high voltage power si  HVPS      F  d    Left  s
106. ation 4 33    5022 xxx    10  Remove the linkage screw  C         4 34 Service Manual    5022 xxx    11  Disconnect the cables for the fan at JFAN1  D   the operator panel at JOPP1  E   the high voltage power    supply connector at JHVPS1  F   and the bin full sensor at JBIN1 G   and USB at J1  H   model C534 only   from the system card                  an Ere Taig  En inim                  ar W F    T RE  i     E    Lk py       D G F E H       Repair information 4 35    5022 xxx    13  Disconnect the ground cable  J      al       14  Lift and remove the top access cover assembly     4 36 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Bin full sensor removal   models C52x    See    Bin full sensor with cable  C520n C522n C524n C524dn    on page 7 3 for the part number     Open the top access door    Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60   Disconnect the spring  A     Remove the seven screws  B  securing the inner access cover     oe       B A B  5  Remove the inner access cover   6  Turn the access cover over  and press the back of the sensor to snap sensor  C  from the bracket                 N       ae     j       z F  4 ee AA  _     Se oe       as               T  Remove the sensor and cable     Repair information 4 37    5022 xxx    Bin full sensor removal   models C53x    See    Bin full sensor with cable  C53x    on page 7 3 for the part number     1  Remove the top access cover assembly  See    Top access cover assembly removal   model C53x only     on page 4 32   2  R
107. bin full sensor 4 38  bin full sensor removal 4 37  bump aligner gear 4 39  bump aligner motor 4 40  bump aligner rollers and springs   C53x 4 42  contact springs 4 44  covers  exit tray cover 4 15  front access cover assembly 4 16  gearbox shield 4 19  left cover 4 20  operator panel assembly 4 23  operator panel inner bezel   C52x 4 22  operator panel outer bezel 4 21  rear cover 4 25  right cover 4 26  top access cover assembly   C52x 4 28  top access cover assembly   C53x 4 32  deflector assembly   C53x only 4 46  electrophotographic  EP  process drive assembly     C52x 4 48  electrophotographic  EP  process drive assembly     C53x 4 51  front access door 5 V interlock switch 4 54  front door assembly 4 55  front door assembly restraint cable 4 59  fuser 4 60  fuser cable cover 4 61  high voltage power supply  HVPS  4 62  left bellcrank 4 64  low voltage power supply  LVPS  4 65  multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm assembly   C52x  only 4 67  paper pick mechanism assembly 4 68  paper tray dust cover 4 24  ohotoconductor unit 4 70  pick roll rubber tires 4 71  precautions 4 13  printer pad 4 73  printhead 4 74  right bellcrank 4 77  smart chip card   C52x 4 78  system card 4 79  system card support shield 4 81  toner level sensor 4 83  top access door 24 V interlock switch 4 85  top cover camshaft assembly 4 86  transfer belt 4 91    transfer contact assembly 4 92  waste toner assembly 4 93  Reset Fuser Cnt 3 21  restraint cable  removal 4 59    S    safety information XV 
108. bly front cable removal    on page 4 59 for proper installation of the  cable restraints     4 58 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Front door assembly front cable removal    See the part number for the Front door parts packet for the model you need on page 7 5     Removal procedures are for either the left or the right front door assembly restraint cables     Right restraint cable    1     PR    Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16    Release the cable spring  A  from the front door assembly    Remove the gearbox switch shield  B   See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19    Remove the end of the cable  C  from the frame     Left restraint cable    1     Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16       Close the top access door     Release the cable spring  D  from the front door assembly   Note  In order to access the springs  make sure the top access cover is closed     Remove the end of the cable  E  from the frame     i                                                                     Installation note  The shortest cable installs on the right side of the printer        Repair information 4 59    5022 xxx    Fuser removal    See    Fuser assembly  115 V    on page 7 15     Fuser assembly  230 V    on page 7 15  or    Fuser assembly   100 V    on page 7 15 for the part number     CAUTION    The fuser can be extremely hot  Use care when handl
109. card  the cable for pinch points   and the cable or the connector for any other damage  If the connector is damaged on  system card  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on page 4 79  If the  fuser cable is damaged  replace the cable     e Check for the following continuity between the DC autoconnect and FUSER1     mel  35  719    rat 2 1416 8  10    configuration    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    If continuity is not present  replace the fuser cable  If the problem persists after replacing  cable  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on page 4 79     Replace the specified toner cartridge   Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     If the message does not clear  replace the smart chip card  See    Smart chip card  removal   models C52x only    on page 4 78     lf the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Replace the specified toner cartridge   Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     If the message does not clear  replace the smart chip card  See    Smart chip card  removal   models C52x only    on page 4 78     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     5022 xxx    Service checks    110 xx   Mirror motor service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the printhead  See   Go to step 2   Check the c
110. ce the paper tray     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    145 xx and 906 05    906 08   Motor   bump aligner  error service check    on   page 2 36     5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     frre  wenn ma    200 22  200 25    201 06  201 07    201 08    Pick  tray 1  motor stalled   Possible causes   e Faulty cable connector  e Faulty pick motor  e Faulty system card    Input sensor is made when tray 1 is  installed     Possible causes     e Improper placement of paper in  tray 1    e Damaged input sensor flag or  input sensor    e Faulty system card    Paper is jammed between the input  sensor and the exit sensor     Possible causes     Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    Damaged fuser autoconnect  Faulty fuser DC cable connection  Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    Exit sensor is made early   Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    Damaged fuser autoconnect  Faulty fuser DC cable connection  Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    Exit sensor is never made   Possible causes     Improper loading of manual feed 
111. continuity of  the HVPS cable     Pin 2 Pin 1    Is there continuity     2 60 Service Manual    Problem solved  Go to step 2     Replace the transfer contact   Go to step 3   assembly  See    Transfer   contact assembly   removal    on page 4 92     Go to step 4  Replace the cable assembly        Pin 23    5022 xxx    Replace the HVPS  See    High voltage power   Problem solved  Replace the system card     supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62  See    System card  Did this solve the problem  penover OE Page t         Print quality   vertical banding    Replace the developer cartridge     Diagnostic information 2 61    5022 xxx    2 62 Service Manual    5022 xxx    3  Diagnostic aids    This chapter explains the tests and procedures to identify printer failures and verify repairs have corrected the  problem     Accessing service menus  There are different test menus that can be accessed during POR to identify problems with the printer     Diagnostics menu 1  Turn off the printer  The Diagnostics menu group contains the settings  2 Press and hold w and  gt   and operations used while manufacturing and  servicing the printer     See    Diagnostics menu    on page 3 2 for more  information     3  Turn on the printer     4  Release the buttons when the  clock graphic displays     Configuration menu 1  Turn off the printer  The Configuration menu group contains a set of  2  Press and hold Dand  gt   menus  settings  and operations which are  infrequently required by a user  General
112. cover    Replace the top access Go to step 2   Check the connector JHVPS1 for proper cover assembly  See    Top   connection to the system card  the cable for access cover assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal   model C52x   any other damage  only    on page 4 28 or    Top   access cover assembly   removal   model C53x   only    on page 4 32     Is the cable damaged     Disconnect JHVPS1 from system card and Go to step 3  Replace the top access   HVPS  Check for the following continuity  cover assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Pin 2 Pin 1    Error code Color JHVPS1 cable to   HVPS    945 01  946 01  957 01 Yellow  Pin Pinio    pene ao  945 02  946 02  957 02 Cyan  meere alll    945 04  946 04  957 04 Black      Is continuity present        2 48 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Remove the HVPS  See    High voltage power   Goto step 4  Replace the transfer contact  supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62  assembly  See    Transfer  Check for continuity between the contacts contact assembly    yellow1 and yellow2  cyan1 and cyan2  removal    on page 4 92   magental and magentaz2  or black1 and   black2  on the transfer contact assembly     f       j   A  S    4     Gs  CA Jind    yellow2  yellow1    cyan1    cyan2  magenta    magenta2             Is continuity present     Replace the HVPS  See    High voltage power   Problem 
113. ct CACHE Test from HARDWARE TESTS in DIAGNOSTICS   The machine initiates a POR of the printer  and the following screen is displayed     Resetting the  Printer    Upon completion of the POR  the following screen is displayed     CACHE Test x100  P   HHH AF    P        represents the number of times the CACHE test has passed  finished successfully   Initially  000000 is displayed  The maximum pass count is 999 999    F        represents the number of times the CACHE test has failed  finished with errors   Initially  000000 is displayed  The maximum fall count is 999 999     F  JHHHHHF    2  To exit the test  turn the printer off     Duplex Tests    Quick Test  duplex     This test prints a duplex version of the Quick Test that can be used to verify the correct placement of the top  margin on the back side of a duplex page  You can run one duplexed page  Single   or continue printing    duplexed pages  Continuous  until Stop      is pressed  For information about changing the margin  see    Top    Margin  duplex     on page 3 14     Note  Before you set the duplex top margin  be sure to set the registration  See    Registration    on page 3 4     3 12 Service Manual                                                       Paj Car    dea                                                                         SAAANA       5022 xxx    The paper you choose to print the page on should be either Letter or A4     To run the Quick Test  duplex      1  Select Quick Test from DUPLEX TESTS  
114. ct to save     scales  then use the coarse adjustment scales at the top of the page      lt P NOTE  If the alignment values cannot be determined by using the fine adjustment    STEP 2  Go to the next page to adjust the Left  L  margin  Right  R  margin  and Bow  P      STEP 3  Reprint these pages to confirm final settings     Go To Step 2       Repair information 4 9    5022 xxx    6  Determine the line under Fine Adjustment that is closest  If the value is beyond the Fine Adjustment scale   use either of the Coarse Adjustment scales        Top  T  Coarse Adjustment    O    240  160  80    If the alignment is not close enough to use  the fine adjustment  get close to the ideal  value by using the coarse adjustment  marks  Select the block that is most filled  by the color on the left  or approximate if   80  60  40  20 O 20 40 60 80 none of the blocks are completely filled  and enter it in for the new value  Reprint  the quick test page and then use the fine  adjustment      80   160    Oo  wait    240         Top  T  Fine Adjustment    20  18    5 First  locate the line of the color that you   4 are aligning that lines up best with the   D sacle line  In this example  it is  18  If none  0 of the colored lines match up  use the   D coarse adjustment to get close  reprint this  A page and then use the fine adjustment     6    8       T  Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part  of the page for the    T    value  Th
115. ctor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     2  Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A    3  Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly     Model C52x Model C53x       Installation notes  When you installed the new transfer belt and moved all the photoconductor units from the  used one to the new one  the alignment of the toner cartridges and photoconductor units may have changed  For  better color quality  perform the Color Alignment procedure in the Configuration Menu  See    Color Alignment     on page 3 24     1  Enter the Configuration Menu   Turn off the printer  press and hold   and p  turn on the printer  and  release the buttons when the clock graphic displays    2  Select Color Alignment  See    Color Alignment    on page 3 24     Repair information 4 91    5022 xxx    Transfer contact assembly removal    See    Transfer contact assembly    on page 7 11 for the part number     Remove the HVPS  See    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62   Remove all the inside contact springs  See    Contact springs removal    on page 4 44   Remove the four screws  A   and remove the transfer contact assembly    Remove the eight springs  B  for reuse during installation    Note  The top spring may fall away from the transfer contact assembly during removal     a ade ea    Installation note  For ease of installation  put the transfer contact assembly on before installing the springs     5
116. d  continue printing     The job may not print correctly   POR the printer  If this does not fix the problem  replace the PCI card     Diagnostic information 2 21    5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     54 Network  lt x gt   software error    55 Unsupported option  in slot  lt x gt     56 Parallel port  lt x gt   disabled    56 Standard parallel port  disabled    56 Serial port  lt x gt     disabled    56 Standard USB port  disabled    58 Too many flash  options installed    58 Too many trays  attached    61 Remove defective  disk       2 22 Service Manual    Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     The job may not print correctly   Program new firmware for the network interface   POR the printer  If this does not fix the problem  replace the PCI card     Turn the printer off    Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet    Remove the unsupported option    Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet   Turn the printer on     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message   The printer discards any data received through the parallel port     Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled   If this does not fix the problem  replace the PCI card     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message   The printer discards
117. d  removal    on page 4 79     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     142 xx and 906 01   906 04    Motor  fuser  error  service check    on page 2 33     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     145 xx and 906 05   906 08   Motor  bump  aligner  error service check    on page 2 36     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79        Diagnostic information 2 15    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     moe  Omen Ba    908 00   908 99 Engine Unrecoverable system software    POR the printer  If the error persists  replace the  Software error errors     system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79        910 01 Transparency Transparency sensor failed See    910 01   Transparency sensor error service   Sensor calibration  check    on page 2 38    920 01 POST Error Bump align motor not connected  See    920 01   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 38    920 02 POST Error Tray 1 motor not connected  See    920 02   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 38    920 03 POST Error Transfer belt not connected  See    920 03    POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 38    920 04 POST Error Fuser motor not connected  See    920 04   POST  power on self test  error  service check    on page 2 39    920 05 POST Error Printhead motor not connected  See    920 05   POST  power on
118. de of the printer    Note  Make a note of the attachment of the printhead ground cable  B  to the second screw from the  bottom for later installation     Remove the four screws  C  from the inner right side of the support shield   Pull the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer       For network printers   Remove the two screws  D  attaching the parallel connector support plate     For non network printers   Remove the INA mounting plate screw  E  and the INA mounting plate     f    hian    2  7  bas  r             ag    Repair information 4 81    5022 xxx    9  Remove the four mounting screws  D  from the top and bottom of the support shield   Note  Only the printhead cables come through the access holes in the system card support shield        10  Lower and remove the support shield  Be careful not to damage the cables that route through the top frame  of the printer     4 82 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Toner level sensor removal    See    Toner level sensor    on page 7 11 for the part number     Note the locations of the toner sensors   Yellow       Cyan Magenta Black    1  Remove the HVPS  See    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62    2  For yellow and cyan only  Remove the transfer contact assembly  See    Transfer contact assembly  removal    on page 4 92   Note  Do not remove the springs from the contact assembly as stated in the last step of the procedure     Repair information 4 83    5022 xxx    3  For all colors  I
119. e    High voltage power   Problem solved  Replace the system card   supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62  See    System card    Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79        2 42 Service Manual    5022 xxx    920 13   POST  power on self test  error service check    Questions   actions       Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JCART1 for proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Replace the EP drive assembly  See     Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48 or     Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly  removal   model C53x only    on page 4 51     Does the error clear     Remove the right cover  Check for the following  continuity between JCART1 and top cartridge  connector   re ms   i it pre E    Bop    S      To cartridge motor  connector  3     i  Is continuity present     Replace the JCART1 cable    Go to step 2   The cable parts packet   contains one cartridge   motor cable that works for   either of the cartridge   motors     Go to step 3  Replace the JCART1 cable   The cable parts packet  contains one cartridge  motor cable that works for  either of the cartridge    motors     Problem solved  Replace the system card   See    System card    removal    on page 4 79     Diagnostic information 2 43    5022 xxx    920 14   POST  power on self test  error service check    Turn the printer
120. e   Test the MFP tray by inserting a sheet of paper  and pushing up  to sensor  The sensor should change state     TPS Open Closed Open the front access door  Slip a piece of paper between the  TPS and the transfer belt  The sensor should change state     Toner C Open Closed Remove the cyan toner cartridge  Shine a flashlight on the toner  level sensor  The sensor should change state    Toner K Open Closed Remove the black toner cartridge  Shine a flashlight on the  toner level sensor  The sensor should change state    Toner M Open Closed Remove the magenta toner cartridge  Shine a flashlight on the  toner level sensor  The sensor should change state    Toner Y Open Closed Remove the yellow toner cartridge  Shine a flashlight on the  toner level sensor  The sensor should change state    Top Door  top Open Closed Open the top access cover assembly  The sensor should   access cover change state    assembly     Waste Toner OK Full Remove the waste toner box before entering the sensor test   The actual test runs when the menu is entered  Replace the  waste toner box  leave the menu  and re enter the menu  The  state should be OK     Press Back      or Stop      to exit the test        Diagnostic aids 3 15    5022 xxx    Printer Setup    Defaults    US Non US defaults changes whether the printer uses the US factory defaults or the non US factory defaults   The settings affected include paper size  envelope size  PCL symbol set  code pages  and units of measure     Warning  Changin
121. e 0 12   0 14 mm  4 8   5 4 mil  in thickness or 161 179 g m  in weight    e Print quality and durability depend on the transparencies used    e To prevent print quality problems  avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies    e Before loading transparencies  fan the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together    e We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter size and Lexmark part number 12A8241 for  A4 size transparencies     Using envelopes    e Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities   When printing on envelopes     e From the control panel  set the Paper Source based on the source in use  From the control panel  the  printer software  or MarkVision Professional  set the Paper Type to Envelope  and select the envelope size    e Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers  Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure  the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 180  C  356   F  without sealing  wrinkling  curling  excessively  or releasing hazardous emissions    e For the best performance  use envelopes made from 90 g m   24 Ib bond  paper  Use up to 105 g m   28 Ib  bond  weight for envelopes as long as the cotton content is 25  or less  All cotton envelopes must not  exceed 90 g m   24 Ib bond  weight    e Use only new envelopes     1 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    e To optimize performance and minimize jams  do not use envelopes that       Have excessive curl or twist      Are stuck together 
122. e 4 92 to view the  proper mounting and for removal procedures   l   ae  High voltage oS  power supply      High voltage D  contact path   Z    Are the spring s  defective        Turn off the printer and check the continuity of   Go to step 7  Replace the cable assembly   the HVPS cable     Pin 23    Pin 2 Pin 1  Is there continuity     Replace the HVPS  See    High voltage power   Problem solved  Go to step 8   supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62     Did this fix the problem     Replace the printhead  See    Printhead Problem solved  Replace the system card     removal    on page 4 74  See    System card    Did this fix the problem  iia ee ade tr    Diagnostic information 2 57    5022 xxx    Print quality   blurred or fuzzy print    Blurred or fuzzy print is usually caused by a problem in the EP drive assembly or in the transfer belt assembly   Check the EP drive assembly and transfer belt assembly for correct operation     Blurred print can also be caused by incorrect feeding from one of the input paper sources  paper trays  or duplex  paper path     Check the high voltage spring contacts to ensure they are not bent  corroded  or damaged  Replace as  necessary     Print quality   half color page    A photoconductor unit is not properly seated  Reset the specific photoconductor unit     Print quality   horizontal banding    Measure the distance between repeating Replace the print cartridge  Replace the photoconductor    bands  unit  See    Photoconductor  unit removal    o
123. e 7 5 for the part number     1  Open the front access cover   2  Remove the gearbox switch shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   3  Remove the C clip  A         4  Remove the right bellcrank     Repair information 4 77    5022 xxx    Smart chip card removal   models C52x only    See    Smart chip card  C52x only    on page 7 9 for the part number     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the system card support shield  See    System card support shield removal    on page 4 81   2  From the outside right of the printer  disconnect the five connectors  A    3  Remove the two mounting screws  B   and remove the smart chip card          Pe     e        da    ry ed      4 78 Service Manual    5022 xxx    System card removal    See the system card part number for the model you need on page 7 9     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is n
124. e current value is automatically entered on the sheet  At this point  it should  be zero     Current New  Cyan Cyan  T value T value       8  Enter the    New Cyan T value    on the operator panel using the right and left arrows  and press Select to  save the value   9  Reprint the Quick Test  and evaluate whether you are at zero changes     4 10 Service Manual    5022 xxx    10  Repeat this process for skew  Z   Don t forget to add the T value and the current cyan Z value to obtain the  new skew  Z  value   An example is shown below     Current New Current New  Cyan Cyan Cyan Cyan  T value T value Z value Z value    STEP 1  Adjust the Top  T  margin and Skew  Z  then confirm before going to Step 2        Repair information 4 11    5022 xxx    11  Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin  T   the Skew   Z   and on the second page of the Quick Test page  the Left Margin  L   Right Margin  R   and Bow  P      Left  L  Fine Adjustment    60       54 Left  L     Coarse    tH    42  36    L 0          Current  Cyan  L value    12     48 Adjustment    Cyan Alignment  Step 2    Bow  P  Coarse Adjustment    AERE     80  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80    Bow  P  Fine Adjustment           20    N A 0O 0 i mi mi m   md  Onego    LN     I    New Current  Cyan Cyan  L value R value    P 0       M M    Current New  Cyan Cyan  P value P value       Repeat steps 2 through 11 for yellow and magenta     Right  R     i Adjustment  i    R 0     Righ
125. e d seia ra e rr e aE E a ri 7 9  Bal codecard OJJAN CIJAdN    ss  lt 82 2 oscar tek E a Se mre Sees Sele 7 20  Fome card Usd Gootd see pa ees tet eee ease eee eee ae eee eee E eels eae e 7 20  PrintCryption card  C534n C534dn                     a rr rrr rrr rrr errr errr eee 7 20  Printer relocation kit                                                         eee eee 7 20  Options tray relocation  Kit        lt  lt    lt s e s 2sseesnee eee eee eee eee eee 7 20    Part number index l 9    5022 xxx    l 10 Service Manual                                          k C52X  5022 sion    Iri i for HVPS  f tor  and b li tor   Wiring Diagram E eaten iy eed                                                 Li  3  5  7  9  iipishisfi 719  2 123  12  476  8 fopi2h ah efi sj2oj2a g   J             Printhead             Thermistor    Exit Ol Jo                irror motor                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  sensor f 5  Bin full sensor  LI      nsH2lihololsi7zlelsl4l3l211  Toroid  5V Interlock  for laser driver  O O ia Switch   7  8        5  6  Autoconnect   3  4   Motor mE   O O    GND  i a  Fuser CRU Yellow cartridge   omj 4  Ble    AE  FB olS  gt  a x  GND    7  Ela  2 z z 2 5      clo  OlT o   gt  2 z 2 2      Cyan cartridge gol bl  ZZEE  
126. e fuser carefully as it remains hot for a while after the printer stops running  Always  unplug connectors by holding the connector housing     Warning  Read the following before handling electronic parts     Handling ESD sensitive parts    Many electronic products use parts that are known to be sensitive to electrostatic discharge  ESD   To prevent  damage to ESD sensitive parts  follow the instructions below in addition to all the usual precautions  such as  turning off power before removing electronic cards     e Keep the ESD sensitive part in its original shipping container  a special    ESD bag     until you are  ready to install the part in the printer    e Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from  clothing fibers  carpets  and furniture    e Putthe ESD wrist strap on your wrist  Connect the wrist band to the system ground point  This  discharges any static electricity in your body to the printer    e Hold the ESD sensitive part by its edge connector shroud  cover   do not touch its pins    e If you need to put down the ESD sensitive part for any reason  first put it into its special bag    e Printer covers and metal tables are electrical grounds  They increase the risk of damage because  they make a discharge path from your body through the ESD sensitive part   Large metal objects can  be discharge paths without being grounded     e Prevent ESD sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel 
127. e opening in the waste toner shutter  G   Make sure  the cam  H  engages the waste toner shutter  G   Also make sure the drive pinion  1  engages the upper  retraction plate  J     8  Install the rear mounting screws  K     9  Slide the spring  L  and the lever arm  M  onto the shaft    10  Install the e clip  N         4 88 Service Manual    11   12     13   14     5022 xxx    Rotate the lever arm  O  all the way up as if the top access door were open    While still holding the lever arm  O  up  flip the right lock  P  up and install the front mounting screws  Q    Warning  Failure to place the camshaft assembly in the open position prevents the front access door from  closing and may cause damage to the door     Continue to hold the lever arm  O  up  Flip the right lock  P  down  and rotate the camshafts  R  up  This is  the open position    Lower the lever arm  O   and make sure the left lock  S  and right lock  P  are positioned correctly in their  respective channels  T         Repair information 4 89    5022 xxx    Note  If the left side of the camshaft assembly becomes disassembled  use the following illustration        4 90 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Transfer belt removal    See    Transfer belt assembly  C52x    on page 7 15 or    Transfer belt assembly  C53x    on page 7 15 for the  part number     1  Remove all photoconductor units  See    Photoconductor unit removal    on page 4 70   Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor un
128. e printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the fuser cable  Go to step 2   Check the connector JFUSER1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Replace the JFUSER1 Go to step 3   page 4 60  Check the DC autoconnects on cable   both the fuser and the printer for damage     Are the connectors damaged        2 40 Service Manual    Check for the following continuity between the  DC autoconnect and FUSER1     eo o e e e e    mal  3  517  9   rag 2 141618  10    configuration    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    Is continuity present     Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on  page 4 60     Does the error clear     5022 xxx    Replace the DC fuser cable     Go to step 4     Problem solved  Replace the system card   See    System card    removal    on page 4 79        920 09 12   POST  power on self test  error service check    Remove the left cover  See    Left cover  removal    on page 4 20  Check all the toner  level sensor cables connected to the rear of  the HVPS for proper connection to HVPS  the  cable for pinch points  and the cable or  connector for any other damage     Are any of the cables damaged     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JHVPS1 for proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any o
129. e printhead  it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be  initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the printer  This allows the pages to be printed that will be  used to align the black plane to the printer frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment  screw  Once black skew is adjusted  the mounting screws will be fully tightened     There is one printhead that houses the four color planes  The black plane is aligned to the printer  and the color  planes are internally aligned to black  Electrical alignment is done to fine tune the alignment of the color planes  to the black plane once the printhead is installed     The first step in aligning the printhead is to set the skew for black   Printhead mechanical alignment  Skew  black     1  During installation of the printhead  the printhead s lower right corner slot  as seen when looking through  the rear of the printer  and the hole in the frame  A  should have been visually aligned        Repair information 4 3    5022 xxx    2  Remove the paper exit tray for access to the printhead alignment screw  B         Enter Diagnostic mode  turn off the printer  press and hold W and  gt   turn on the printer  and release the  buttons when the clock graphic displays     Select REGISTRATION    Select Skew    Adjust this setting to zero  and press Select   Q       Press Back           Sore  p    4 4 Service Manual    5022 xxx    8  Scroll down to Quick Test  and press
130. e voltmeter can be  placed on the metal frame to obtain ground     Is voltage present    Replace the bump aligner motor  See    Bump  aligner motor removal    on page 4 40   Does the error clear     Go to step 2 Close the top access door     Replace the top access door  24 V interlock switch  See     Top access door 24 V  interlock switch removal     on page 4 85     Go to step 3   Go to step 4     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Replace the top access door  24 V interlock switch  See     Top access door 24 V  interlock switch removal     on page 4 85     Problem solved     Is the top access door completely closed     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JDUPLX1 for proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any other damage     Is the cable damaged   Close the front access door  Turn the power    on  and check for 24 V dc between JCVR1  pin 1  red wire  and ground     Note  The ground lead of the voltmeter can be  placed on the metal frame to obtain ground     Is voltage present   Replace the duplex front door assembly  See       Front door assembly removal    on  page 4 55     Does the error clear     2 36 Service Manual    o  Go to step 2  Close the top access door     Replace the duplex front  door assembly  See    Front  door assembly removal     on page 4 55     Go to step 3   Go to step 4     Replace the system card   See    System card  r
131. ed on page 7 5     1  Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16    2  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    3  For C52x only  Disconnect the JTRANS1 cable  A  from the system card   For C53x only  Disconnect the JTRANS2 cable  A  from the system card   Note  If you have a duplex model  also disconnect the JDOUPLX1 cable  B  from the system card     Pa   i  JT       Repair information 4 55    5022 xxx    4  Models C52x only  Disconnect the cable  C  from the right side of the frame  Be careful not to lose the  grounding clip  D      Ye ee       A             es        5  Remove the gearbox shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   6  Close the front door assembly   7  Release the left and right front door assembly cable restraint springs  E  from the front door assembly       oa       8  Open the front door assembly     4 56 Service Manual    5022 xxx    9  Unwrap and remove the cable from the left and right pulleys  F      L p         Pa    Z      sen 7y  vy       Repair information 4 57    5022 xxx    11  Open the front door assembly  slide it to the right  and remove  You need to press firmly to slide the front  door assembly to the right        Installation note  See    Front door assembly front cable removal    on page 4 59 for proper installation of the  cable restraints     4 58 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Front door assembly front cable removal    See the part n
132. el   display is blank  Go to    Operator panel display blank  five beeps  and LED  off    on page 2 53    Operator panel continuously displays all Go to    Operator panel display blank  five beeps  and LED   diamonds and does not complete POST  off    on page 2 53     Print quality symptom table       Missing image at edge Go to    Print quality   missing image at edge    on page 2 58     page 2 58        2 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Error codes and messages    Service error codes and paper jam messages    1xx service error codes    110 01   110 06 Mirror  Motor    111 01 111 05  Printhead Error    112 01 112 05  Printhead Error    113 01 113 05  Printhead Error    114 01 114 05  Printhead Error    120 01   120 02 Fuser  Error    120 03 Fuser Error    120 04   120 07 Fuser  Error    120 08 120 10   120 13    120 15 Fuser  Error    140 03    140 08  Autocomp Motor Error    142 09 142 18   142 20    142 25  142 27  Motor Error    143 09 143 18   143 20    143 25  Motor Error    144 09 144 18   144 20 144 25  Motor Error    145 09 145 18   145 20 145 25  Motor Error    A mirror motor error has occurred     An error has occurred in the cyan  channel of the printhead     An error has occurred in the magenta  channel of the printhead     An error has occurred in the yellow  channel of the printhead     An error has occurred in the black  channel of the printhead     An error has occurred in the fuser     An error has occurred in the fuser     An error has occurred in the fuser
133. el sheets  Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing  resulting in a jam  Partial  sheets also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive  and could void the printer and  cartridge warranties    e Do not print within 1 mm  0 04 in  of the edge of the label  of the perforations  or between die cuts of the  label    e Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge  Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm   0 04 in  away from edges is recommended  Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the  warranty    e lf zone coating of the adhesive is not possible  remove a 3 mm  0 125 in   strip on the leading and driver  edge  and use a non oozing adhesive    e Portrait orientation works best  especially when printing bar codes    e Do not use labels with exposed adhesive     Using card stock    Card stock is heavy  single ply print media  Many of its variable characteristics  such as moisture content   thickness  and texture  can significantly impact print quality     Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities   When printing on card stock     e From MarkVision Professional  the printer software  or the control panel       Set the Paper Type to Card Stock       Set the Paper Weight to Card Stock Weight       Setthe Card Stock Weight to Normal or Heavy     General information 1 9    5022 xxx    e Be aware that preprinting  perforation  and creasing may significantly affect the print
134. elect EVENT LOG from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Display Log     Up to three error codes display at a time  Press A or W to view additional error codes  Press   to view  additional details     Press Back      to return to the EVENT LOG menu   Print Log    Additional diagnostic information is available when you print the event log from DIAGNOSTICS rather than  CONFIG MENU     The Event Log printed from DIAGNOSTICS includes     e Detailed printer information  including code versions  e Time and date stamps   e Page counts for most errors   e Additional debug information in some cases       Model and Event Log     Serial number        Lexmark E534  s n 20000000X     Devroe ilori    ej a  y    Printer information           Panel display E Eram Log ivfermation    when error occurred _          amie  Page count        i      Thar    Earliest error code                    The printed event log can be faxed to Lexmark or your next level of support for verification or diagnosis     3 18 Service Manual    5022 xxx    To print the event log     1  Select EVENT LOG from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Select Print Log     Press Back      to return to EVENT LOG     Clear Log    Use Clear Log to remove the current information in the Event Log  This affects both the viewed log and the  printed log information     1  Select Clear Log from the Event Log menu   2  Select YES to clear the Event Log or NO to exit the Clear Log menu  If YES is selected  Deleting EVENT  LOG displays on the screen     Press Back     
135. els C524dn  C524dtn  C530dn  C532dn  and  C534dn dtn  factory installed    Integrated network options      Token Ring      Ethernet      External serial adapter      PRESCRIBE card assembly      Barcode card assembly      Parallel interface card      MarkNet    Print Servers      Lexmark PrintCryption    card      Lexmark Forms card  single byte and Simplified Chinese  on models C534n  C534dn  and C534dtn    General information 1 1    5022 xxx        Lexmark Bar Code Card is available on models C534n  C534dn  and C534din       Lexmark ImageQuick    Card is available for the models C534n  C534dn  and C534dtn  e DBCS font cards       Simplified Chinese       Traditional Chinese       Japanese       Korean    Specifications    Resolution    e 1200 x 1200 dpi  e 4800CQ    Data streams  e PostScript 3 emulation  e PCL 5c and 6  XL  emulation  e PDF 1 5 emulation  e PPDS  if activated     Memory configuration    Memory type    C534dn dtn    q  N  LO    O O O O O O O O  Optional memory  MB  128  256  and 512 MB available     100 pin DDR SDRAM  unbuffered DIMMs     Optional flash memory 32 and 64 MB available       Performance factors    Performance speed depends on     e Interface to the host  USB  serial  parallel  network   e Host system and application   e Page complexity and content of the page   e Printer options installed or selected   e Available memory in the printer   e Media size and type   e Resolution    1 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Power requirements    Average nom
136. emoval    on page 4 79     Replace the top access door  24 V interlock switch  See     Top access door 24 V  interlock switch removal     on page 4 85     Problem solved        5022 xxx    147 xx  149 xx   Motor  500 sheet 550 sheet option tray 2 motor  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the option cable  Go to step 2   Check the connector JOPT1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Replace the 500 sheet assembly or the Problem solved  Replace the system card   550 sheet assembly  See    System card    Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the paper pick Go to step 2   Check the connector JTRAY2 for proper mechanism  See    Paper   connection to the system card  the cable for pick mechanism assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal    on page 4 68    any other damage     Is the cable damaged                 Measure the resistance across fuse F2 on the Replace the system card  Go to step 3   system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79   EV  F4  EV Fs  Is the fuse blown     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        Diagnostic information 2 37    
137. emove the three screws  A  from the cable cover        A       4  Remove the bin full sensor and cable     4 38 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Bump aligner gear removal    See the Bump aligner gear kit on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the paper pick mechanism assembly  See    Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68    Close the front access door for better access to the gears    Remove the three e clips and washers  A     Remove the gears     aa          Installation notes     e When reinstalling the gears  apply a light coat of the packaged grease     e The following illustration shows proper orientation of the gears for installation  The two gears are reduction  gears with the largest of the two  B  located in the middle  on the top     B       Repair information 4 39    5022 xxx    Bump aligner motor removal    See    Bump aligner motor    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the right side cover   2  Remove the bump aligner gears  See    Bump aligner gear removal    on page 4 39   3  Remove the two bump aligner motor mounting screws  A         4 40 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Disconnect the JBUMP1 connector  B  from the system card     4       on                          i              h   Di  4    5  Remove the bump aligner motor from the printer     Repair information 4 41    5022 xxx    Bump aligner rollers and springs removal   models C53x    See    Bump aligner roller and spring    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove
138. er   e User attendance messages are indicated by a two digit code that provides the user with information that  explains a problem with a print cartridge  option  port  and so on  If a user error message displays  see     User status and attendance messages    on page 2 19 or    2xx paper jam messages    on page 2 8     Additional information    e    Operator panel and menus    on page 2 2  e    Power on self test  POST  sequence    on page 2 5  e    Theory of operation    on page 3 30    Diagnostic information 2 1    5022 xxx    Operator panel and menus  Operator panel    The operator panel consists of these items        CO                              mmr    Cac      eo Oo O79       q f  oe    Button or light   or Button or light      Display m display shows messages and pictures that communicate the  status of the printer     The   button functions as a select button  Press this button to     Note  It has a check e Open a menu and display the first item in the menu  called a menu  mark     icon  item      e Open a menu item and display the default setting     e Save the displayed menu item as the new user default setting  The  printer issues a Saved or Submitted Selection message and  returns to the menu item     Note  When a new setting is saved as the user default setting  it  remains in effect until new settings are saved or until factory defaults  are restored  Settings chosen from the software application can also  change or override the user default settings selected
139. er cartridge  The  toner cartridge contains a toner adder roll  developer roll and toner  Toner is advanced toward the toner adder  roll by three paddle assemblies  The advanced toner clings to the electrically charged toner adder roll  The toner  on the toner adder roll is then electrically attracted to the developer roll because of the difference in electrical  charge between the toner adder roll and the developer roll  The toner uniformly coats the developer roll with help  from the doctor blade and is introduced to the electrostatic image on the photoconductor drum  The toner then  transfers to the photoconductor drum     Photoconductor unit Developer cartridge            Photoconductor  drum  Developer roll    Toner add roll Paddles   TAR     3 50 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Transferring    After the toner is attracted to the photoconductor drum  the image is ready for transfer onto the print media  The  print media is advanced in the paper path onto the transfer belt and is carried along the belt underneath each  photoconductor unit  The charged transfer roll s  located inside the transfer belt pulls the image from the  photoconductor drum to the print media  This is a direct transfer method     The main function of the transfer belt is to provide transport for the print media  Toner is not transferred directly to  the belt during the print process     Photoconductor unit       Photoconductor  drum    Transfer roll    Diagnostic aids 3 51    5022 xxx    Fusing    Afte
140. eral  motor tests    on page 3 8    Tray 2  if installed Tests tray 2 motor located in the paper pick mechanism  See    General  motor tests    on page 3 8    Bottom Cartridge Tests the bottom cartridge motor located on the EP drive assembly  See     General motor tests    on page 3 8    Top Cartridge Tests the top cartridge motor located on the EP drive assembly  See     General motor tests    on page 3 8    Transfer Tests the transfer belt assembly motor located on the EP drive assembly   See    General motor tests    on page 3 8    Mirror Motor Test Tests the mirror motor located in the printhead assembly  See    Mirror  Motor Test    on page 3 8     Motor Calibration Synchronizes the bump aligner and fuser motor speeds with the transfer  belt soeed to ensure that output is printed correctly  See    Motor  Calibration    on page 3 9     Servo Laser Test Tests servo laser located in the printhead  See    Servo Laser Test    on  page 3 9     3 2 Service Manual       5022 xxx    Diagnostics mode tests  continued     PRINT TESTS  Tray 1  Tray 2  if installed   Manual Feeder  if installed   MP Feeder  Prt Quality Pgs See    Print quality test pages  Prt Quality Pgs     on page 3 10     HARDWARE TESTS    Panel Test See    Panel Test    on page 3 11     See    Input source tests    on page 3 9        Button Test See    Button Test    on page 3 11    DRAM Test See    DRAM Test    on page 3 11    CACHE Test See    CACHE Test    on page 3 12   DUPLEX TESTS  if installed    Quick Tes
141. es not break   Possible causes   e Incorrect media setting  e Incorrect paper loading  e Incorrect media restraint setting  e Paper tray failure  e Paper pick mechanism    Input sensor is made when printer  powers up or covers are closed     Possible causes     e Paper jam leaving page over  sensor    e Defective input sensor  e Faulty system card    Bump aligner motor stalled   Possible causes   e Faulty cable connector    e 24 V interlock switch not working  correctly    e Faulty bump align motor  e Faulty system card    POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     146 xx   Motor  duplex  error service check    on  page 2 36     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     147 xx  149 xx   Motor  500 sheet 550 sheet  option tray 2 motor  error service check    on  page 2 37     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     148 xx   MPF motor error service check    on  page 2 37     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     147 xx  149 xx   Motor  500 sheet 550 sheet  option tray 2 motor  error service check    on  page 2 37        Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan media  and stack flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in the paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Repla
142. ews  A    4  Remove the gearbox shield  B   There is a locking tab on the back of the gearbox shield     Warning  When removing the gearbox shield  be careful not to damage the 5 V interlock switch arm   ee i 3       Repair information 4 19    5022 xxx    Left cover removal    See    Left cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     Place the printer on the table with the left side edge hanging over slightly    Remove the waste toner assembly  See    Waste toner assembly removal    on page 4 93   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove the three screws  A     Press the locking tab  B   slide the cover down  and lift the bottom out to remove the cover   Warning  Be careful not to damage the two small locking tabs  C      A ee a       4 20 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Operator panel outer bezel removal    See    Outer bezel  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number for the C52x models  See the same page for the  specific models for the bezels for the C53x models     1  Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool  unsnap the locking tabs  A  on the upper left and the upper  right of the outer bezel   Note  The top portion of the operator panel disengages with the outer bezel  Flex the top of outer bezel to  disengage the operator panel     2  For models C52x  Remove the outer bezel with the inner bezel  B  attached   For models C53x  Remove the bezel  The bezel is one piece for this set of models        Installation note  When reinstalling or replacing 
143. g this setting resets the printer to factory defaults  and data may be lost  It cannot be undone     Page Counts  You can view  but not change any of the three counts displayed under PAGE COUNTS   To view the Prt Color Pg Count  the Prt Mono Pg Count  or the Perm Page Count     1  Select PRINTER SETUP from DIAGNOSTICS     2  Select PAGE COUNTS    3  Select the page count you wish to view   e Prt Color Pg Count  e Prt Mono Pg Count  e Perm Page Count    Press Back      to return to PRINTER SETUP   Serial Number    The serial number can only be viewed and changed   To view or change the serial number     1  Select Serial number from PRINTER SETUP   2  Press Back      to return to PRINTER SETUP     Engine Setting 1 through 4  Warning  Do not change these settings unless requested to do so by your next level of support   Model Name    The model name can only be viewed and cannot be changed     Configuration ID    The two configuration IDs are used to communicate information about certain areas of the printer that cannot be  determined using hardware sensors  The configuration IDs are originally set at the factory when the printer is  manufactured  However  the servicer may need to reset Configuration ID 1 or Configuration ID 2 whenever the  system board is replaced  The IDs consist of eight digits  The first seven digits in each ID are hexadecimal  numbers  while the last digit is a checksum of the preceding seven digits  Each ID can contain a combination of  the digits O through
144. ground lead of the voltmeter can be  placed on the metal frame to obtain ground     Is voltage present    Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on  page 4 60    Does the error clear     Go to step 2 Close the top access door     Lift the top access door to its  widest position  and put the  right bellcrank  A  into its  slot     Go to step 3     Go to step 4   Go to step 5     Replace the system card   See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Replace the fuser cable     Replace the top access door  24 V interlock switch  See     Top access door 24 V  interlock switch removal     on page 4 85     Problem solved        Diagnostic information 2 33    5022 xxx    143 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly top cartridge  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the JCART1 cable    Go to step 2   Check the connector JCART1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged              Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48 or removal    on page 4 79      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly   removal   model C53x only    on page 4 51     Does the error clear     Measure the resistance across fuse F4 andF5   Replace the system card  Go to step 3   on the system card  See    System card  removal    o
145. he JIRAY1 and JI RAY2 connectors do not bind when passing through the frame  access hole     Repair information 4 69    5022 xxx    Photoconductor unit removal    Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and    ee    place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on  page 4 2 for additional information    Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Lift the right end handle  A  of the photoconductor unit  releasing from the mount    Lift the unit up and away from the left side of printer  ensuring the left end of the photoconductor is released    from the holding pin  B         B    Installation note  If a new photoconductor unit is installed  reset the life count value in the printer memory     e  fa message appears on the operator panel     1     When 84  lt color gt  PC Unit Life Warningor84 Replace  lt co or gt  PC Unit appears   select Supply Replaced  and then press       Replace Supply displays    Select Cyan PC Unit  Magenta PC Unit  Yellow PC Unit  or Black PC Unit based on the  photoconductor unit that was just replaced  and then press        lt color gt  PC Unit Replaced displays    Select Yes  and then press    to clear the message     o message appears     Press       Select Supplies Menu  and press       Press    to select Replace Supply    Select Cyan PC Unit  Magenta PC Unit  Yellow PC Unit  or Black PC Unit based on the  photoconductor unit tha
146. he multipurpose feeder or manual feeder  Note  The multipurpose feeder can also be used as a manual feeder   Loading media in the multipurpose feeder or manual feeder  1  Use the marks above the slot to adjust the width guide for standard paper sizes  For odd sizes  once the    paper is isolated  move the width guide until it lightly touches the sheet   Warning  Do not force the width guide against the paper  or it could be damaged                 2  When Load manual feeder with  lt x gt  appears on the display  load a single sheet of paper flush with  the right side of the slot  and then press  y    Load an envelope with the flap side up     ee             3  Push the paper in until it stops  The printer pulls it in farther   Note  Maintain pressure on the paper or envelope until the printer takes the paper from your hand     Clearing a paper jam in the multipurpose feeder    When paper jams in the multipurpose feeder  a 250 xx  201 08  or 200 11 Paper Jam message appears     1  Pull the paper down and out   2  Open the top access cover  and close it                 3  Load the paper  and push the paper in until it stops  The printer should pull it in farther   Note  Maintain pressure on the paper or envelope until the printer takes the paper from your hand     3 28 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Clearing paper jams in the manual feeder    When paper is not placed far enough into the manual feeder  the display prompts you to insert paper     If the paper is pushed far enough 
147. he paper exit flag within a given time  a paper jam error will be posted     There is a similar paper flag  bin full  on the output of network machines  This sensor indicates when the output  bin is full  The physical flag is located in the fuser on all machines  however  the electrical sensor is not present  on the non network models  The flag should move in and out of the sensor eye with every sheet until the bin is   nearly full  Once in this state  the paper flag will break the sensor eye continuously     Note  Bin full sensor is located  Paper exit duplex in top cover assembly  entry sensor    Paper exit duplex  entry flag Bin full flag       Fuser access door removed for clarity     Diagnostic aids 3 43    5022 xxx    Electrophotographic  EP  process    Main components             High voltage  power supply       Developer  toner   cartridge    Transfer belt    Photoconductor  belt    System card    The system card is the brain of the printer  During the print process  an image is sent from a computer to the  system card  The raster image processor  RIP  portion of the system card converts the data into a raster image  and feeds this data along with control information to the printhead     3 44 Service Manual    5022 xxx    High voltage power supply  HVPS   Provides a high voltage charge to     e The charge roll located in the photoconductor unit   e The photoconductor drum located in the photoconductor unit  e The toner adder roller  TAR  located in the toner cartridge
148. he printer containing the damaged pad over the corner of the table   2  Pull the pad  A  from the bottom of the printer        Installation Note  When installing the new pad  remove the appropriate side cover that corresponds to the  damaged pad  It is necessary to remove the corresponding side cover to see if the pad fully seats in the  installation holes  B      Repair information 4 73    5022 xxx    Printhead removal    See    Printhead assembly  C52x    on page 7 9 or    Printhead assembly  C53x    on page 7 9 for the part  number     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the toner cartridges    2  Remove the exit tray cover  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15    3  Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A     4  Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly   Note  Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing     Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged peri
149. head assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     Warning  Be careful not to damage the printhead cable when removing the system card     1  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    2  Disconnect all the connectors from the system card   Warning  Do not use tools to remove the printhead ribbon cable  A   It can be damaged and should be  removed gently by hand  When installing  carefully line up the cable  and press straight into the connector        Repair information 4 79    5022 xxx    3  Remove the screw  B  from the USB connector   4  For models C52x only  If a non network system card is installed  also remove the two screws  C  from the  parallel connector     Network system card Non network system card          ji     wik  kH   IFFT      l  j l  fi         d       l  t h    1 5  VE       fei    bes    es sa E T   SSeS  oe i a     P r          6  Remove the system card     4 80 Service Manual    5022 xxx    System card support shield removal    See    System card support shield  C52x    on page 7 9 or    System card support shield  C53x    on page 7 9  for the part number     Aa ed a    OND    Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Remove the left cover  See    Left cover removal    on page 4 20    Remove the LVPS  See    Lo
150. i il  ii 4l     hy AL vil    Ue a  i       one  ne roll Developer roll high  Ign voltage voltage contact path  contact path    Diagnostic aids 3 47    5022 xxx    Transfer belt    The transfer belt houses four transfer rollers that provide image transfer from the photoconductor drum to the  print media  The transfer belt receives its high voltage charge through spring contacts located on the transfer  contact assembly as shown in the following illustration  For the sake of simplicity  only one of the roller s high  voltage paths is shown  This path is typical for the other three rollers as well     Transfer belt high  voltage path              Pil      WALA          mpa    M    4        Su           PrE     iiss     3 48 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Exposing    The main components in the exposure process are the system card  the printhead and the photoconductor unit   The following illustration depicts a typical data path for a single color exposure     Data is received from a computer into a port on the system card  The system card s RIP function converts this  data into raster information which is fed to the printhead along with other control data  The data is converted by  the printhead laser into light energy data that is directed to the light sensitive photoconductor unit     System card    Printhead       Photoconductor  unit    Diagnostic aids 3 49    5022 xxx    Developing    The two primary components of the developing process are the photoconductor unit and the ton
151. ia  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF     Replace the MPF swing arm assembly      Multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm  assembly removal   models C52x only    on  page 4 67     If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  to    148 xx   MPF motor error service check     on page 2 37           900 00   900 99 Software  Error    902 01    902 99 Engine  Software Error    903 01   903 05 Engine  Software Error    904 01   904 04 Interface  Violation by RIP    905 xx Engine Software  Error    906 01   906 04 Fuser  Motor Error    906 05   906 08 Bumper  Motor error    907 xx Engine Software  Error    Unrecoverable RIP software error     Unrecoverable system software  errors     Unrecoverable system software  errors     Unrecoverable system software  errors     Unrecoverable system software  errors     Fuser motor has failed     Bump aligner motor has failed     Unrecoverable system software  errors     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     POR the printer  If the error message persists   replace the system card  See    System car
152. ice Manual    5022 xxx    Gearbox shield removal    Not a FRU   1  Remove the paper tray   2  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   3  Remove the four screws  A    4  Remove the gearbox shield  B   There is a locking tab on the back of the gearbox shield     Warning  When removing the gearbox shield  be careful not to damage the 5 V interlock switch arm   ee i 3       Repair information 4 19    5022 xxx    Left cover removal    See    Left cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     Place the printer on the table with the left side edge hanging over slightly    Remove the waste toner assembly  See    Waste toner assembly removal    on page 4 93   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove the three screws  A     Press the locking tab  B   slide the cover down  and lift the bottom out to remove the cover   Warning  Be careful not to damage the two small locking tabs  C      A ee a       4 20 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Operator panel outer bezel removal    See    Outer bezel  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number for the C52x models  See the same page for the  specific models for the bezels for the C53x models     1  Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool  unsnap the locking tabs  A  on the upper left and the upper  right of the outer bezel   Note  The top portion of the operator panel disengages with the outer bezel  Flex the top of outer bezel to  disengage the operator panel     2  For models C52x  Remove the o
153. ide       E H G F J    13  Lift and remove the top access cover assembly     Repair information 4 31    5022 xxx    Top access cover assembly removal   model C53x only    See    Top access cover assembly  network   C532n C534n    on page 7 3 or    Duplex top access assembly   network   C530dn C532dn C534dn    on page 7 3 for the part number     Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on page 4 60    Remove the four screws  A  exposed after removing the fuser     ee    I  l    Sa  i eel    Wf i  Pa 4    We   j J  o         6  Remove the operator panel  See    Operator panel assembly removal    on page 4 23   T  Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15     4 32 Service Manual    5022 xxx    8  Remove the screw  B  exposed after removing the exit tray        9  If the top access door is open  close it   Warning  Ensure that top access door is closed before removing the linkage screw  Failing to close the    door leaves the linkage under a load  which may result in the linkage screw being catapulted away from the  printer when removed     Repair information 4 33    5022 xxx    10  Remove the linkage screw  C         4 34 Service Manual    5022 xxx    11  Disconnect the cables for the fan at JFAN1  D   the operator panel at JOPP1  E  
154. in  See    Registration    on page 3 4     To set the Top Margin  duplex      1  Print the Quick Test  duplex    a  Select Quick Test from DUPLEX TESTS   b  Select Single   C  Hold the page to the light to see whether the top margin of the back aligns with the top margin of the  front   2  Select Top Margin from DUPLEX TESTS   3  Use 4 or P to select the margin setting you need to change     e Each increment shifts the duplex top margin by 1 100 of an inch   e The Top Margin  duplex  range is  20 to  20  and the default value is 0     e An increase moves the top margin down and widens the top margin  A decrease moves the top  margin upward and narrows the top margin     4  Press Q      5  Print the Quick Test  duplex  again to verify the adjustment  Repeat if necessary     Motor Test  duplex   This test is used to determine whether or not the duplex unit paper feed drive system is working correctly     1  Select Motor Test from DUPLEX TESTS  The duplex motor runs continuously until stopped     The message Motor Running displays     2  To stop the test  press Back      or Stop          Input Tray Tests    If tray 2 is installed  the INPUT TRAY TESTS menu appears  This test is used to determine if the Tray 2 full  sensor is sensing properly     To run the Input tray test     1  Select INPUT TRAY TESTS from the Diagnostics mode   2  Select Sensor Test   3  Select Tray 2   Tray2 full displays   4  Toggle the sensor to change the display and determine whether the sensor is operati
155. inal power requirements for the base printer configuration  110 volt   Power levels are shown in  watts  W   Maximum current is given in Amperes  A      Lexmark C524  Lexmark C520n Lexmark C534n  Lexmark  Printing states C524n  C524dn  C522n i C534dn  C530dn  C532n   C524dtn C534dtn C532dn    Idle   average power    Power Saver off 105 W 105 W 120 W 120 W    Printing   average power    Printing   maximum average current       Electrical specifications    Low voltage model    e 110 to 127 V ac at 47 to 63 Hz nominal  e 99 to 137 V ac  extreme    High voltage model    e 220 to 240 V ac at 47 to 63 Hz nominal  not available in all countries   e 198 to 259 V ac  extreme    100 V model    e 100 V acat 47 to 63 Hz nominal  e 90to 110 V ac  extreme    Notes     e Using a 220 to 110 power converter with the 110 V printer is not recommended   e Using an inverter  12 V dc to 120 V ac for example  to power the printer is not recommended     General information 1 3    5022 xxx    Environment    Air Temperature   Product Operating  Air Temperature   Product Power Off    Wet Bulb Temperature   Product Operating 22 8   C  73 0   F  Maximum  Web Bulb Temperature   Product Power Off 26 7   C  80 1   F  Maximum    Altitude O to 3048 meters  10 000 feet   Atmospheric Pressure 74 6 kPa    Ambient Operating Environment  15 6 to 32 2  C  60 to 90  F  and 8  to 80  RH    Cartridges  40   C to  40   C  104   Fahrenheit     Printer with Cartridges  40   C to  40   C  104   Fahrenheit   Printer withou
156. information 2 31    5022 xxx    140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the paper pick Go to step 2   Check the connector JT RAY2 for proper mechanism  See    Paper   connection to the system card  the cable for pick mechanism assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal    on page 4 68    any other damage  See    Connectors    on   page 5 11 for the location of connectors     Is the cable damaged              Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     Measure the resistance across fuse F2 on the Replace the system card  Go to step 3   system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79   lF   E  F4  E  Fs  Is the fuse blown        2 32 Service Manual    5022 xxx    142 xx and 906 01    906 04   Motor  fuser  error service check    Is the top access door completely closed     Turn the printer off  and remove the fuser    g es E   i i  Is the right bellcrank  A  out of its slot     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover   Check the connector JFUSER1 for the proper  connection to the system card  the cable for  pinch points  and the cable or connector for  any other damage     Is the cable damaged   Turn the printer power on  and check for    24 V dc between JCVR1 pin 1  red wire  and  ground     Note  The 
157. ing to avoid burns        AN    Turn off the printer    Open the top access door    Rotate the fuser thumbscrews  A  counterclockwise until loosened   Grasp the handles  B   lift the fuser straight up and away from the printer        B    Installation note  If you install a new fuser  be sure to reset the fuser counter in the Configuration Menu  To  reset the counter     1   2   3   4     Enter the Configuration Menu   Turn off the printer  press and hold and p  turn on the printer  and  release the buttons when the clock graphic displays     Press  Y  for the Reset value    Resetting Fuser Count Value appears    Press    to select Motor Calibration from the CONFIG MENU  Calibrating displays  and the printer  prints several blank pages and then returns to the CONFIG MENU    Select Exit Config Menu     See    Page Counts    on page 3 16     4 60 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Fuser cable cover removal    See    Fuser cable cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X1430   C52x    on page 7 5 or    Fuser cable  cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X3598   C53x    on page 7 5 for the part number     a    Open the top access door   Open the front access door   Remove the yellow and cyan toner cartridges     Pull the locking tab  A  down on the left side of the cable cover  B   slide the cable to left  lower and  remove        Repair information 4 61    5022 xxx    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    See    High voltage power supply  C52x    on page 7 11 or    High voltage p
158. inting     Delete fonts  macros  and other data in printer memory    Install additional printer memory    lf this does not fix the problem  replace the system  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     37 Insufficient memory   some held jobs were lost       38 Memory Full    50 PPDS font error    51 Defective flash  detected    52 Not enough free  space in flash memory  for resources    53 Unformatted flash  detected    54 Serial option  lt x gt   error    The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the hard  disk     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message     If this message occurs again  replace the hard drive     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79        Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     The job may not print correctly   Cancel the current job   Install additional printer memory     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the mess
159. into the manual feeder for the printer to sense it  but not far enough to feed  properly  200 xx  200 11  or 201 08 Paper Jam messages appear     In either case  push the paper farther into the manual feeder              ee             If the paper does not feed     1  Remove the paper or envelope   2  Open the top access cover  and close it           3  Load the paper  and push the paper in until it stops  The printer should pull it in farther   Note  Maintain pressure on the paper or envelope until the printer takes the paper from your hand     Diagnostic aids 3 29    5022 xxx    Theory of operation    Paper path    Paper exit flag                  Fuser  Transfer  belt    System  card    Bump roller  align    Input flag    Paper pick    mechanism Duplex       MPF  pick    3 30 Service Manual    5022 xxx       Diagnostic aids 3 31    5022 xxx    Main Components    System card    The system card provides the intelligence of the printer  Command and control signals originate in the system  card that make print media travel possible  The system card controls the timing of the print media during the  printing so the media arrives at certain positions in the print process at certain times     Paper tray  Houses the print media   Paper pick mechanism    Picks the print media from the paper tray  The paper pick mechanism contains the paper pick  input  Sensor and  the multifunction transparency sensor     Bump aligner roll    The bump aligner roll advances the print media onto the
160. is registration in the printer  When small black text or fine  black lines are being printed  the printer checks to see if they are being printed on top of a colored background   If so  rather than remove the color from beneath the black content  the printer leaves the color around the edge  of the text or line  The hole in the colored region is reduced in size which prevents the characteristic white gap  that is caused by mis registration     This menu item applies to PCL 5 emulation  PCL XL  PDF  and PostScript     Selections are Off and the values 1 through 5  with 2 as the default  Values 1 through 5 indicate the amount of  color remaining beneath the black content  Each setting increments by 1 600 of an inch  The more inaccurate  the registration setting  the higher the setting needs to be adjusted  Selecting Off disables color trapping     Diagnostic aids 3 21    5022 xxx    Size Sensing    Turns the automatic size sensing for print media input sources either to Auto or Off     Selections include Tray 2 Sensing  if the tray is installed  Auto  default   and Off  This is a two level menu that  displays only those print media sources which support automatic size sensing     Panel Menus    Lets the system support person enable or disable the operator panel menus  Selecting Enable  the default   prevents users from changing values for the printer  Disable allows users to changes the values     This menu item only appears when the PUL PASSWORD Environment variable is set to 
161. its by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged period of time  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     2  Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A    3  Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly     Model C52x Model C53x       Installation notes  When you installed the new transfer belt and moved all the photoconductor units from the  used one to the new one  the alignment of the toner cartridges and photoconductor units may have changed  For  better color quality  perform the Color Alignment procedure in the Configuration Menu  See    Color Alignment     on page 3 24     1  Enter the Configuration Menu   Turn off the printer  press and hold   and p  turn on the printer  and  release the buttons when the clock graphic displays    2  Select Color Alignment  See    Color Alignment    on page 3 24     Repair information 4 91    5022 xxx    Transfer contact assembly removal    See    Transfer contact assembly    on page 7 11 for the part number     Remove the HVPS  See    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62   Remove all the inside contact springs  See    Contact springs removal    on page 4 44   Remove the four screws  A   and remove the transfer contact assembly    Remove the eight springs  B  for reuse during installation    Note  The top spring may fall awa
162. kew adjustment is attempted  The following  illustration shows proper alignment versus skewed alignment     Straight Skewed       Diagnostic aids 3 5    5022 xxx    Quick Test    The Quick Test contains the following information     Print registration settings    Alignment diamonds at the left  right  top and bottom  Horizontal lines to check for skew    General printer information  including current page count  installed memory  serial number  and code level                                                                                                                       To print the Quick Test page     Note  Print the Quick Test Page on letter or A4 paper   1  Select REGISTRATION from DIAGNOSTICS   2  Press wuntil the y appears next to Quick Test   The message Quick Test Printing   appears on the display     Once the Quick Test Page completes printing  the Registration screen displays again    3 6 Service Manual    Alignment    5022 xxx    Alignment is part of the process of adjusting the printhead and the color planes to the black plane and to each  other  Before you start  perform the black alignment  Registration   See    Registration    on page 3 4  If you are  replacing a new printhead  perform the entire printhead alignment  See    Printhead alignment    on page 4 3     To perform alignment     1     2 NE U RAPE    9     Select ALIGNMENT from DIAGNOSTICS  Scroll until you reach the color that you desire to align  Go to  each submenu  press Select and use the right 
163. kout which opens the 24 V dc interlock switch  When the top door is closed  with the front access door also closed  the drive retraction lockout trips the switch arm which closes the 24 V dc  interlock switch        Drive retraction Switch arm 24 V interlock  lockout switch    When the 24 V switch opens  the normally open side of the switch is activated which signals the system card to  disable a  24 V power supply output  turning off all high voltage supplies  the bump align motor  the duplex  motor and the fuser motor for safety considerations     Diagnostic aids 3 55    5022 xxx    3 56 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Repair information    Removal and cleaning precautions    AN Observe the following precautions whenever you service the printer     Be sure to unplug the printer from the outlet before attempting to service the printer    To reassemble the printer  reverse the order of removal unless otherwise specified    Do not operate the printer anytime during removals  If it is absolutely necessary to run the printer with its  covers removed  use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the gears   rollers and fan motor    Never touch the terminals of electrical parts or high voltage parts such as the high voltage power supply   After part replacement  ensure the wiring harness is not caught or damaged    Do not attempt to cut or extend the wiring harness    Confirm the wiring harness connector is connected properly    Be sure to handle th
164. l    on page 4 92   Note  Do not remove the springs from the contact assembly as stated in the last step of the procedure     Repair information 4 83    5022 xxx    3  For all colors  It is difficult to press both locking tabs at the same time  Using a spring hook   press the locking tab  A   and disengage the sensor on that side  Press the other locking tab  B    and remove the sensor                 4 84 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Top access door 24 V interlock switch removal    See    Top access door 24 V interlock switch    on page 7 13 for the part number     1  Remove the top access cover assembly  See    Top access cover assembly removal   model C52x only     on page 4 28   2  Disconnect the JCVR1 connector  A  from the system card        3  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   4  Remove the mounting screw  B  and 24 V interlock switch  C         Repair information 4 85    5022 xxx    Top cover camshaft assembly removal    See    Top cover camshaft assembly    on page 7 13 for the part number     1         90    eo A PD    Remove the top access door 24 V interlock switch  See    Top access door 24 V interlock switch  removal    on page 4 85    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21    Rotate the lever arm  A  all the way up as if the top access door were open  hold the lever arm  A  in place   and rotate the camshafts  B  down to the closed position    While still holding the lever arm  A  up 
165. libration    on page 3 24     To cancel a reset  press Back     Color Lock Out    Called Black Only Mode in C52x models     Select On when printing for extended periods with only black toner  This saves the toner cartridges  cyan   magenta  and yellow  and photoconductor units from excessive wear  In addition to setting the values  the cyan   magenta  and  yellow toner cartridges and their matching photoconductor units must be removed from the  printer     Select Off  default  when printing with color toner     Note  Remove all the color supplies from the printer before selecting the On value from the operator panel   Install all the color supplies before selecting the Off value from the operator panel     Prt Quality Pgs    To help isolate print quality problems  print the Print Quality Test Pages  The pages are formatted  The  Printing Quality Test Pages message appears  then the pages print  The message remains on the  operator panel until all the pages print     Press Select to print the pages  The Print Quality Test Pages contain several pages  The first page which is  printed in English text only contains a mixture of text and graphics  The information includes values of the Quality  Menu settings in Settings and printer and toner cartridge configuration information  The remaining pages only  contain graphics  For samples of the pages  see    Print quality test pages  Prt Quality Pgs     on page 3 10     Color Trapping    Uses an algorithm to compensate for mechanical m
166. ligner gear kit on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the paper pick mechanism assembly  See    Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68    Close the front access door for better access to the gears    Remove the three e clips and washers  A     Remove the gears     aa          Installation notes     e When reinstalling the gears  apply a light coat of the packaged grease     e The following illustration shows proper orientation of the gears for installation  The two gears are reduction  gears with the largest of the two  B  located in the middle  on the top     B       Repair information 4 39    5022 xxx    Bump aligner motor removal    See    Bump aligner motor    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the right side cover   2  Remove the bump aligner gears  See    Bump aligner gear removal    on page 4 39   3  Remove the two bump aligner motor mounting screws  A         4 40 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Disconnect the JBUMP1 connector  B  from the system card     4       on                          i              h   Di  4    5  Remove the bump aligner motor from the printer     Repair information 4 41    5022 xxx    Bump aligner rollers and springs removal   models C53x    See    Bump aligner roller and spring    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the paper tray   2  Push up and back to relase the bump aligner spring        3  Lower the bump aligner spring to remove it        4 42 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Remove the bump
167. llow  and magenta     1       ey    Press Back      on the operator panel until you reach the top menu  select ALIGNMENT MENU  and  press Select    Select Cyan    Select Top Margin  and use the right and left arrow keys to select zero  Press Select    y   to save the  setting    Select Left Margin  Right Margin  Bottom Margin  Skew  and Bow  In each menu  use the right and left  arrow keys to select zero  and press Select   y   to save the value    lt is important to set all the values to zero before starting     4 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Select Quick Test in the Cyan menu  and press Select   Two pages print  You may have to print these pages several times until you get T and Z aligned  Do not go  to step 2 until T and Z are aligned  The first page is similar to the following     Cyan Alignment  Step 1    t ii     B0  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80  80  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80    Top  T  Coarse Adjustment Skew  Z  Coarse Adjustment    Top  T  Fine Adjustment Skew  Z  Fine Adjustment    nN  o        20      18         16            14         12         10         O 0    gt     d  onego            IN    bhahCnNaa    a Z Qe_    i   P  Current New Current New    Cyan Cyan Cyan Cyan  T value T value Z value Z value    STEP 1  Adjust the Top  T  margin and Skew  Z  then confirm before going to Step 2   Press the up or down buttons until a check appears at the setting in need of adjustment     Press Select  Then use the  lt  and  gt  buttons to enter the new value  Press Sele
168. ly  the  options made available in this menu group are  used to configure a printer for operation     See    Configuration menu  CONFIG MENU     on  page 3 20 for more information     3  Turn on the printer     4  Release the buttons when the  clock graphic displays        To run the printer diagnostic tests described in this chapter  you must put the printer in Diagnostics mode     Diagnostic aids 3 1    5022 xxx    Diagnostics menu  Note  Tray 2 refers to the 500 sheet tray located in the 500 sheet option assembly   Diagnostics menu structure    When the Diagnostics mode is entered  each Diagnostics main menu item displays on the operator panel  When  a diagnostic test is selected from the main menu  a sub menu displays and each individual test displays in the  order shown  Any options that are referred to in the menus are displayed when the option is installed     Available tests    The tests display on the operator panel in the order shown     Diagnostics mode tests    REGISTRATION    Top Margin See    Registration    on page 3 4   Bottom Margin   Left Margin   Right Margin   Skew See    Skew    on page 3 5    Quick Test See    Quick Test    on page 3 6   Cyan See    Alignment    on page 3 7   Yellow   Magenta    of alignment pages for each individual color   Tests the bump aligner motor  See    General motor tests    on page 3 8   Tests the fuser motor  See    General motor tests    on page 3 8     Tray 1 Tests tray 1 motor located in the paper pick mechanism  See    Gen
169. m   Remove the e clip  F     Slide the lever arm  A  and the spring  G  off the shaft    Warning  When removing the right rear mounting screw  be careful not to damage or remove the spring  that mounts over the screw     Remove the rear mounting screws  H    Remove the top cover camshaft assembly        4 86 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation notes     Warning  Do not install the camshaft assembly by reversing the removal procedures  The camshaft assembly  and EP drive assembly must be set to the closed and engaged positions respectively before the  camshaft assembly is installed  or the printer will not work correctly     1  Ensure the EP drive assembly is engaged by sliding the upper retraction plate  A  fully to the rear            N fi       y  t ne 4  is  inf f  Ea i      a       Remove the camshaft from the package  and place the left and right mounting brackets  B  on a flat  surface    Rotate the lever arm  C  all the way up as if the top access door were open  hold the lever arm  C  in place   and rotate the camshafts down  D  to the closed position    Release the lever arm  C     Remove the e clip  E       Slide the lever arm  C  and the spring  F  off the shaft     Aub oO N       Repair information 4 87    5022 xxx    T  Place the left side of the camshaft assembly through the opening in the waste toner shutter  G   Make sure  the cam  H  engages the waste toner shutter  G   Also make sure the drive pinion  1  engages the upper  retraction plate  J     8  I
170. maged  contact your next level of service     A    Inspect the toner cartridge contacts for damage or contamination  Replace the toner  cartridge if defective     Inspect JSBTN1 cable connection  Properly connect the cable if not connected properly   Replace the cable if damaged     For models C52x  Replace the smart chip card  See    Smart chip card removal     models C52x only    on page 4 78     If the problem still exists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79        Diagnostic information 2 19    5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued        34 Short Paper    34 Incorrect Media    35 Insufficient memory  to support Resource  Save feature    37 Insufficient memory  to collate job    37 Insufficient memory  for Flash Memory  Defragment operation    37 Insufficient memory   some held jobs were  deleted    2 20 Service Manual       Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     The printer does not automatically reprint the page that prompted the message   Check the tray length and width guides to ensure the media is properly fitted   Make sure the print job is requesting the correct size of media    Adjust the Paper Size setting for the media size being used     If the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal  make sure the media is large enough for the  formatted data     Cancel the current job  Replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper pick  mechanism assembly removal    
171. mechanical transfer of the high voltage through a set of springs to each  subcomponent of the charging process     Photoconductor unit  charge roll     The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the  charge roll contact on the photoconductor unit  It is essential that the contact springs are properly touching to  provide a good flow  If not  print quality problems will occur        High voltage  power supply    High voltage  contact path    Photoconductor unit  photoconductor drum     The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the  photoconductor drum contact on the photoconductor unit  It is essential that the contact springs are properly  touching to provide a good flow  If not  print quality problems will occur     High voltage  power supply       High voltage  contact path    3 46 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Toner cartridge    The following illustration shows the circuit path that allows high voltage current to flow from the HVPS to the  toner cartridge  The toner cartridge contains three parts that are provided high voltage from the HVPS  These  three parts are  the doctor blade  the developer roll  and the toner adder roll  TAR   It is essential that the contact    springs are properly touching to provide a good flow  If not  print quality problems will occur     High voltage Cleaner blade high  power supply voltage contact path            
172. metal cabinet  case     e Be extra careful in working with ESD sensitive parts when cold weather heating is used  because low  humidity increases static electricity     Repair information 4 1    5022 xxx    Handing the photoconductor unit    The following precautions must be observed when handling the photoconductor unit  The photoconductor unit is  a supply item you will have to remove during some of the repair procedures     Transportation storage  Use the specified carton whenever moving or storing the photoconductor unit     Handling    e The optical photoconductor roller in the photoconductor unit exhibits the greatest light fatigue after being  exposed to strong light over an extended period of time  Never expose it to direct sunlight  Cover the  photoconductor unit when you remove it from the printer     e Use care not to contaminate the surface of the optical photoconductor roller with an oil based solvent   fingerprints  and other foreign matter   e Do not scratch the surface of the optical photoconductor roller     Parts not to be touched    Any part where the mounting screws are used to meet a printer alignment set at the factory must not be  removed  disassembled  or adjusted     4 2 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Adjustments    Printhead alignment    Overview    When reinstalling the printhead  it is important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be  initially tightened just enough to hold the printhead in the printer  This allows the pages to
173. mp aligner motor    Note  If this motor is stalling or causing waste toner box full messages  the vertical auger mechanism might be  causing the problem     3 38 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Photoconductor unit toner cartridge drive    The photoconductor units  four  and toner cartridges  four  receive drive power from the EP drive assembly  motors  The top cartridge motor 1 on the EP drive assembly provides drive to the top two photoconductor units  and toner cartridges  yellow and cyan   Likewise  the bottom cartridge motor 2 drives the two bottom  photoconductor units and toner cartridges  When the printer s top access door is open  the couplers for the toner  cartridges and photoconductor units disengage     Outside       Cartridge motor 1    Cartridge motor 2    Photoconductor  couplers    Toner  cartridge  couplers       Diagnostic aids 3 39    5022 xxx    Transfer belt drive    The transfer belt unit receives drive from a motor located on the EP drive assembly  When the top access door is  open  the coupler for the transfer belt disengages     Outside Inside       Transfer belt Coupler  motor    Fuser drive    The fuser drive  motor  is built into the fuser assembly and drives the fuser rollers to turn     3 40 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Duplex drive    The duplex motor is mounted on the front door assembly  Drive is provided to three drive shafts in the duplex unit  by a belt that is driven by the motor  The drive shafts move the print media through the duplex uni
174. mponent  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     Warning  Never install and remove components listed above as a method of troubleshooting components   Once a component has been installed in a printer  it cannot be used in another printer  It must be  returned to the manufacturer     This error code indicates a mismatch between the system card and the smart chip card     Models C52x only    Has the smart chip card been recently Replace the smart chip card   Replace the system card  replaced  with a new  and not with a new  and not    previously installed smart previously installed system  chip card  See    Smart chip   card  See    System card  card removal   models removal    on page 4 79   C52x only    on page 4 78        2 50 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Models C53x only    Has the printhead been recently replaced  Replace the printhead with Replace the system card  with a new  and not  previously installed system  card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     a new  and not previously  installed smart chip card   See    Printhead removal     on page 4 74        Dead printer service check    A dead printer is a condition where the display is blank  the LED on the operator panel is off  no fans turn  no  motors turn  and the fuser lamp does not come on     If a 500 sheet option assembly  C52x models  or a 550 sheet option assembly  C53x models  is installed  
175. n    Is the distance between bands either 27 or page 4 70     36mm        Print quality   horizontal line  The photoconductor unit is defective  Replace the photoconductor unit     Print quality   insufficient fusing    _ Is the fuser properly installed  Go to step 2  Install the fuser properly     2    Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Replace the LVPS  see  page 4 60     Low voltage power  supply  LVPS  removal       Does this fix the problem  on page 4 65        Print quality   missing image at edge  Reseat the developer cartridge   Print quality   mottle  2 5mm speckles     Keep running prints through  and the problem normally clears up  If the problem persists  replace the developer  cartridge     Print quality   narrow vertical line    Replace the photoconductor unit  See Problem solved  Replace the print cartridge      Photoconductor unit removal    on  page 4 70        2 58 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Print quality   random marks    Service tip  The primary cause of random marks is due to loose material moving around inside the printer and  attaching to the photoconductor unit  developer roll  or transfer belt     Is there any loose or foreign material on the Replace the photoconductor   Go to step 2   photoconductor unit  unit  See    Photoconductor   unit removal    on   page 4 70     Is there any loose or foreign material on the Replace the print cartridge  Go to step 3   cartridge roll     Is there any loose or foreign material on the
176. n   MPF paper tray assembly  250 sheet  C530dn C532dn C534dn  Paper tray assembly  single feeder  C532n  C534n   Transfer belt assembly  C52x   Transfer belt assembly  C53x   Power cord   USA  Canada  Bolivia  Peru   Power cord   Argentina   Power cord   Australia  New Zealand    Power cord   Austria  Belgium  Catalan  Czechoslovakia  Finland  France   Germany  Greece  Hungary  Ireland  Italy  Netherlands  Norway  Paraguay   Poland  Portugal  Russia  Spain  Sweden  Turkey  United Kingdom    Power cord   Austria  Belgium  Catalan  Czechoslovakia  Finland  France   Germany  Greece  Hong Kong  Hungary  Ireland  Italy  Netherlands   Norway  Paraguay  Poland  Portugal  Russia  Singapore  Spain  Sweden   Turkey  United Kingdom    Power cord   Brazil   Power cord   Chile  Uruguay   Power cord   China   Power cord   Denmark  Finland  Norway  Sweden  Power cord   lIsrael   Power cord   Japan   Power cord   Korea   Power cord   South Africa   Power cord   Switzerland   Power cord    Taiwan       Parts catalog 7 15    5022 xxx    Assembly 8  Contact springs        4 places   4 places      4 places         8 places         8 places         4 places     7 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 8  Contact springs    Units    Units  a  index pm Umat fum pesoto OO       8 1 40X1434 1 1 Contact springs kit  including   A    Torsion PCD contact spring  4   B   Torsion CR contact spring  4   C   Contact spring cap  4   D   Charge roll contact spring  8   E   HVPS TAR contact spring  4   F   
177. n C524dn                 7 15  Bin full sensor with cable  network printers only                                             7 3  Front access door cover assembly  duplex   C524dn only                                    7 3  Ground contact plate  C52x                rec tr re cc rere rete ecee 7 7  right belicrank assembly                  26 020 er cere er ee ee ee ees 7 5  Left bellcrank assembly     lt   lt     6 05 004 sects tee ees eee ee tee eee ese es 7 5  Inner bezel  C524 C524n C524dn                                                    7 3  Inner bezel  C522n                                                              7 3  Inner bezel  C520n                                                                 7 3  Top access cover assembly  network          c  3 coer seer ete ene eee eee oe eee 7 3  32 MB flash card                                 rere eee ee eee eee eee  e 7 20  64 MB flash card                                                                     7 20  128 MB SDRAM  100 pin                                                          7 20  256 MB SDRAM  100 pin                                                              7 20  512 MB SDRAM  100 pin                                                            7 20  Japanese font card                                                             7 20  Simplified Chinese font card                                                       7 20  Traditional Chinese font card        lt  lt  lt     2 5 me eer ee ee ee ee en
178. n page 4 79   lF    F4  E  Fs  Is either fuse blown        2 34 Service Manual    5022 xxx    144 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly bottom cartridge  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace JCART2 cable  Go to step 2   Check the connector JCART2 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged                 Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48 or removal    on page 4 79      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly   removal   model C53x only    on page 4 51     Does the error clear        Measure the resistance across fuse F5 and F6   Replace the system card  Go to step 3   on the system card  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79   lF   EFA  E  Fs  Is either fuse blown     Diagnostic information 2 35    5022 xxx    145 xx and 906 05   906 08   Motor  bump aligner  error service check    Is the top access door completely closed     Open the top access door  and slowly close it   You should hear the top access door 24 V  interlock switch closing when the door almost  shuts  If you do not  check the switch for  damage     Is the switch damaged   Close the top access door  Turn printer power    on  and check for 24 V dc between JCVR1 pin  1  red wire  and ground     Note  The ground lead of th
179. nd connectors 5 11    5022 xxx    System card  non network    models C52x             o ipl    Bre  m   JC  o    moir     n  oOo    JLVPS1                                                                JFUSER1  X gt   OG                                                                                                                                                             i                      STRANS2    Dies          JUSB1                      JCART2                                          NDUPLX  f    QQ    Jp  oo  J ysJJTRAY2          JTRAY1       STRANS1      yorr1  ALE                                              5 12 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C52x   see    System card  network    models C52x    on page 5 11 or    System card  non network    models C52x    on    page 5 12     Connector    JBIN1 V_BF   5 SW   S_BIN_FB  Ground  VS_BUMP_LED  S BUMP_ENC  Ground  V_BUMP_M   V_BUMP_M   V_JC1 1  V_JC2 3  Ground    JBUMP1    JCART1 V_JC1 2  V_JC1 4   5V SW  V_C2_U  V_C2_W  V_JC2 2  V_JC2 4  _5V_SW  V_C2_U  V_C2_W     lt   O    V_C2_V  CART2_HALL_V  CART2_HALL_W  Ground    JCART2    V_C2_V  V_24V_CVR  COVER_OPEN_SNS  VS_DUPLX   5 V   DUPLEX PWM  DUPLEX _ENC  Ground   V_24VD   Ground   FAN FG   Ground    24VC   FAN1_ PWM  V_FUSER_M   VS_FUSER_LED  Ground  FUSER_EXIT_SNSD  FUSER_HR_SNS    10  JCVR1    JDUPLX1           Z       O    JFAN1    JFUSER1 V_FUSER_M   S_FUSER_ENC  GND BR_THERM  VS_FUSER 5V    10 FUSER_HR_THM_RIN    Locations and connector
180. ner  box    Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue processing     Any information not previously stored on the hard disk is deleted   Delete fonts  macros  and other data stored on the hard disk   Install a larger hard disk     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Format the disk   If the error message remains  replace the hard disk     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Format the disk   If the error message remains  replace the hard disk     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and  continue printing     Order a replacement fuser  When print quality is reduced  install the new fuser using the  instruction sheet that comes with the replacement fuser     lf this does not fix the problem  replace the system card See    System card removal    on  page 4 79   Replace the fuser     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and
181. ng electronic parts     Handling ESD sensitive parts    Many electronic products use parts that are known to be sensitive to electrostatic discharge  ESD   To prevent  damage to ESD sensitive parts  follow the instructions below in addition to all the usual precautions  such as  turning off power before removing electronic cards     e Keep the ESD sensitive part in its original shipping container  a special    ESD bag     until you are  ready to install the part in the printer    e Make the fewest possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from  clothing fibers  carpets  and furniture    e Putthe ESD wrist strap on your wrist  Connect the wrist band to the system ground point  This  discharges any static electricity in your body to the printer    e Hold the ESD sensitive part by its edge connector shroud  cover   do not touch its pins    e If you need to put down the ESD sensitive part for any reason  first put it into its special bag    e Printer covers and metal tables are electrical grounds  They increase the risk of damage because  they make a discharge path from your body through the ESD sensitive part   Large metal objects can  be discharge paths without being grounded     e Prevent ESD sensitive parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel  Install printer  covers when you are not working on the printer  and do not put unprotected ESD sensitive parts ona  table    e If possible  keep all ESD sensitive parts in a grounded 
182. ng properly     Press Back      or Stop      to exit the test     3 14 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Base Sensor Test    Bin Full Test    This test is used to determine if the bin full sensor is operating correctly  This test is only applicable to network  printers  To run the Bin Full Test     1  Select BASE SENSOR TEST from DIAGNOSTICS     2  Select Bin Full Test  The display shows Bin Ful and the current state of this sensor  either Closed or  Open  Move the bin full sensor flag  located on the fuser  up and down to toggle the sensor state     Sensor Test    This test is used to determine if specific sensors are working correctly  If you need to know where a sensor is  located  refer to    Sensors    on page 5 8  To run the Sensor Test     1  Select BASE SENSOR TEST from DIAGNOSTICS     2  Select Sensor Test  The display shows each one of the sensors  one line at a time  and the current state of  the sensor  Use the down arrow to locate the sensor in question  Use the following table to toggle the  sensor     Fuser Exit  paper   Open Closed Open the top access cover  Activate the fuser exit flag  The   exit  sensor should change state    Inner Door  front   Open Closed Open the front access door  The sensor should change state    access door    Input Open Closed Remove the paper tray 1  Activate the input sensor flag  The  sensor should change state     Narrow Media Open Closed Test the manual feed slot by pulling out the tray  The sensor   transparency  should change stat
183. ns do not fix the problem   replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68     Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in the paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Replace the paper tray     Replace the MPF swing arm assembly  See     Multipurpose feeder  MPF  swing arm  assembly removal   models C52x only    on  page 4 67     If the previous actions do not fix the problem   replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68     5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     frre  owen ma    290 05 While feeding from the MPF  the input Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper    250 21    sensor is not made     MPF motor stalled     9xx service error messages    used   Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in the paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Replace the paper tray     Models C52x only  Replace the MPF swing  arm assembly  See    Multipurpose feeder   MPF  swing arm assembly removal   models  C52x only    on page 4 67     If the previous actions do not fix the problem     replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68     Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan med
184. nsor flag broke early   Possible causes     e Paper jam leaving page over  sensor    e Defective input sensor   e Faulty system card  Cartridge motor 1  top  or cartridge  motor 2  bottom  has stalled   Possible causes    e Faulty cable connector   e Faulty cartridge motor   e Faulty system card    Special case   Possible cause   e System card code failure    A 201 08 jam occurred and was not  cleared     Possible cause   Failure to open and  close the top access door     Exit sensor is made when printer tries  to print from an idle state     Possible causes     Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    Damaged fuser autoconnect  Faulty fuser DC cable connection  Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    Exit sensor broke early     Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    e Faulty fuser  e Faulty system card    Exit sensor never broke   Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    e Faulty fuser  e Faulty system card  e Faulty output bin flag       Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    143 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly top  cartridge  error service check    on page 2 34  and then    144 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly  bott
185. nstall the new transfer  belt using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement transfer belt     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Replace the transfer belt using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement  transfer belt  See    Transfer belt removal    on page 4 91     lf the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Ignore appears  and then press   to clear the message and continue  printing    Order the specified photoconductor unit  When print quality is reduced  install the new  specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the replacement  specified photoconductor unit     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Replace the specified photoconductor unit using the instruction sheet that comes with the  replacement specified photoconductor unit     If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     84  lt color gt  PC Unit e Scroll down the operator panel to see if the printer is showing that all four of the PC units   missing are missing  If so  check the HVPS cable between the system card and the HVPS  Ensure  that the cable is not plugged in backwards on the HVPS  Disconnect and reconnect the  cable to make sure there is good co
186. nstall the rear mounting screws  K     9  Slide the spring  L  and the lever arm  M  onto the shaft    10  Install the e clip  N         4 88 Service Manual    11   12     13   14     5022 xxx    Rotate the lever arm  O  all the way up as if the top access door were open    While still holding the lever arm  O  up  flip the right lock  P  up and install the front mounting screws  Q    Warning  Failure to place the camshaft assembly in the open position prevents the front access door from  closing and may cause damage to the door     Continue to hold the lever arm  O  up  Flip the right lock  P  down  and rotate the camshafts  R  up  This is  the open position    Lower the lever arm  O   and make sure the left lock  S  and right lock  P  are positioned correctly in their  respective channels  T         Repair information 4 89    5022 xxx    Note  If the left side of the camshaft assembly becomes disassembled  use the following illustration        4 90 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Transfer belt removal    See    Transfer belt assembly  C52x    on page 7 15 or    Transfer belt assembly  C53x    on page 7 15 for the  part number     1  Remove all photoconductor units  See    Photoconductor unit removal    on page 4 70   Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged period of time  See    Handing the photocondu
187. ntact     e Insert or reinstall the specified photoconductor unit and see if problem clears  See     Photoconductor unit removal    on page 4 70     e Remove the top access cover assembly  see    Top access cover assembly removal     model C52x only    on page 4 28 or    Top access cover assembly removal   model  C53x only    on page 4 32   and confirm that the camshaft follower  A  on the left side is  not out of the groove  B   If the camshaft follower is out of the groove  raise the arm  use a  screwdriver to ease the camshaft follower back into the groove  You need to press down  to snap it into position     e Check the high voltage contacts path  especially the    finger    on the specified  photoconductor unit  printer is shown with components removed for clarity      High volt TE y OS  MARE      Nia    High voltage S    SF  contact path      e If the contacts are good  replace the HVPS  See    High voltage power supply  HVPS   removal    on page 4 62     e If the problem persists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79        Diagnostic information 2 25    5022 xxx    User status and attendance messages  continued     87 Fuser missing    88  lt color gt  Cartridge low    88 Replace  lt color gt   cartridge    2 26 Service Manual       e Install the fuser  Replace the fuser if the problem persists     e If the problem continues  turn the printer off and remove the rear cover  Check the  JFUSER1 connector for proper connection to the system 
188. od of time  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     C52x C53x            5  Remove the system card support shield  See    System card support shield removal    on page 4 81   6  Remove the fuser cable cover  See    Fuser cable cover removal    on page 4 61     4 74 Service Manual    5022 xxx    T  Remove the three mounting screws  C  from the front of the printhead   Warning  Secure the printhead when removing the printhead alignment screw  Failure to do this allows  the printhead to fall out of the printer  potentially damaging the printhead        8  Close the top access cover and remove the printhead alignment screw  D   and remove the printhead        Repair information 4 75    5022 xxx    Installation notes     Do not install the printhead mounting screws in the rear of the printer  When reinstalling the printhead  it is  important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be initially tightened just enough to hold the  printhead in the printer  This allows the pages to be printed that will be used to align the black plane to the printer  frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment screw  Once the black skew is adjusted  the  mounting screws will be fully tightened     1  When installing the printhead  do a rough alignment by visually centering the hole in the frame  C  with the  slot on the bottom of the printhead  Do not fully tighten printhead mounting screws until skew has been  adju
189. om cartridge  error service check    on  page 2 35 if necessary     POR the printer  Replace the system card if the  error message persists  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     If replacing system card does not fix the  problem  contact your next level of support     This error is generated as a protection for possible  paper wrap in the fuser  Open the top access door   and check for a paper jam  Close the top access  door  If the jam is cleared  and the error does not go  away  go to    Exit sensor service check    on   page 2 52     e Check for anything in the paper path that might  cause the paper to jam     e The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     e Check output bin flag on fuser for proper  operation  Ensure that paper is not hanging on  the flag     e The fuser exit sensor may not be functioning  properly  See    Exit sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     5022 xxx    frre  owen ma    202 17    202 21    203 09  203 14    203 15  230 03    Exit sensor is made when the printer  powers up or covers are closed     Possible causes     e Damaged paper exit sensor or  paper exit sensor flag    e Damaged fuser autoconnect  e Faulty fuser DC cable connection  e Faulty fuser   Faulty system card    Fuser motor stalled   Possible
190. on page 4 68     If the problem still exists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Load the appropriate media in the selected source     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to clear the message and print  the job using a different paper source     POR the printer to recalibrate transparency sensor     Ensure the transparency sensor is mounted correctly in the paper pick mechanism  If not   snap it into place     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper pick mechanism assembly removal     on page 4 68     If the problem still exists  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to disable Resource Save and  continue printing     To enable Resource Save after receiving this message       Make sure the link buffers are set to Auto  then exit the menus to activate the link  buffer changes     When Ready is displayed  enable Resource Save     Install additional memory     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press w until   Continue appears  and then press   to print the portion of the job  already stored and begin collating the rest of the job     Cancel the current job     If this does not fix the problem  replace the system card  See    System card removal    on  page 4 79     Press W until   Continue appears  and then press   to stop the defragment  operation and continue pr
191. onnector JMIRR1 for proper    Printhead removal    on   connection to the system card  the printhead page 4 74    cable for pinch points  and the cable or   connector for any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Replace the printhead  See    Printhead Problem solved  Replace the system card   removal    on page 4 74  See    System card    Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79     Is the front access door completely closed  Go to step 2 Properly close the door     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the front access Go to step 3   Check the connector JINT1  5 V interlock door 5 V interlock switch   switch cable  for proper connection to the See    Front access door  system card  the cable for pinch points  andthe   5 V interlock switch  cable or connector for any other damage  removal    on page 4 54   Is the cable damaged   Turn the printer power on  and check for 5 V dc   Replace the front access Go to step 4   between JINT1 pin  red wire  and ground  door 5 V interlock switch   See    Front access door  Is voltage present  5 V interlock switch  removal    on page 4 54     Replace the printhead  See    Printhead Problem solved  Replace the system card   removal    on page 4 74  See    System card    Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79        Diagnostic information 2 27    5022 xxx    120 01  120 02  120 08   120 10  120 13   120 15   Fuser error service check    Check the input voltage switch on the back of Go to step 2  Set the 
192. or cover assembly  duplex   C530dn C532dn C534dn                          7 3  Top access cover assembly  network   C530dn C532n C534n                                  7 3  Duplex top access assembly  network   C532dn C534dn_                                   7 3    l 8 Service Manual    40X3607  40X3608  40X3609  40X3610  40X3611  40X3612  40X3613  40X3614  40X3615  40X4199  40X4217  40X4218  40X4219  40X4237  40X4238  40X4239  7377018  7377200    5022 xxx    PIKANT TOI fat tse a rs ae a Se ae la tte eta Sais ee tae  Sah eee e a 7 15  Bezo OSIO ee ele 7 3  FOWer COlO   Japall 2 lt  Sees et eat ee ae Here a Se ee See ae Seis Se See eee 7 15  Power cord    Taiwan                                         e e eee eeee  ee eee 7 15  Power cord   Brazil                                                           eee 7 15  Paper tray dust cover with spring  C53x                                   7               7 3  Top cover camshaft assembly                      rrr rrr rrr E a a a 7 13  Bump aligner roller and spring                                                          7 5  Dalec  aSSemDIy Cook mar eerde dete Sees Sees eae eS eee Sees ae Sai Se Siete Sere ee 7 5  PrintCryption card  C524 C524n C524dn                      rrr rr rrr rrr rr rrr E ee ee 7 20  Dy cle Cold Re se a Serre oe ee Bes eee See lar eae se oe ee ee ee ee Scere 7 9  System card  network   C524n C524dn                           5 rr rere rere errr ree eee 7 9  System card  network   C520n C522n  s Se sa strdk
193. or damaged in any way      Have windows  holes  perforations  cutouts  or embossing      Have metal clasps  string ties  or folding bars      Have an interlocking design      Have postage stamps attached      Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position      Have bent corners      Have rough  cockle  or laid finishes  e Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes     Note  A combination of high humidity  over 60   and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal  envelopes     Using labels    Print samples on the labels being considered for use before buying large quantities  For detailed information on  label printing  characteristics  and design  see the Card Stock  amp  Label Guide available on the Lexmark Web site  at www lexmark com publications     Note  Vinyl labels are not supported on this product  Use only paper labels   When printing on labels     e From the printer software  MarkVision Professional  or the control panel  set the Paper Type to Labels    e Use only letter   A4   and legal size label sheets    e Use labels designed specifically for laser printers  Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that  label adhesives  face sheet  printable stock   and topcoats can withstand temperatures up to 180  C   356   F  and pressure up to 30 psi without delaminating  oozing around the edges  or releasing hazardous  fumes  Do not use vinyl labels    e Do not use labels with slick backing material    e Use full lab
194. ormal duplex  mode feeds two sheets simultaneously  while duplex gloss feeds only one sheet     Selections include Off  default  and On     Diagnostic aids 3 25    5022 xxx    Font Sharpening    Lets a user set a text point size value below the setting of the high frequency screens used when printing font  data  This menu item only affects the PostScript  PCL 5  PCL XL  and PDF emulators     Settings are in the range of 0 150  24 is the default   For example  if the value is set to 24  then all fonts sized 24  points or less use the high frequency screens  To increase value by 1  press the right arrow  to decrease the  value by 1  press the left arrow     Exit Config Menu    Press Select to exit the CONFIG MENU  The printer performs a power on reset and returns to normal mode     3 26 Service Manual    Paper Jams    Error jam locations    5022 xxx    The following illustration shows the location and error codes generated for specific paper jams and the    corresponding locations of these jams     A         203 Paper Jam  exit sensor retract  when duplexing       230 Paper Jam  exit sensor to  input sensor   when duplexing f         igh    EARO           gt    242 Paper Jam      tray 2 i                  a       iz     242 Paper Jam  tray 1 Tooo                               200 Paper Jam  input sensor area                      230 Paper Jam  exit sensor to  input sensor   when duplexing           250 Paper Jam  MPF feeder    Diagnostic aids 3 27    5022 xxx    Paper jams in t
195. ossible causes   Incorrect media setting  Incorrect paper loading  Incorrect media restraint setting  Paper tray failure  Paper pick mechanism failure    While feeding from tray 1  the input  sensor is made while the previous  page is still in aligner     Possible causes   Incorrect media setting  Incorrect paper loading  Incorrect media restraint setting  Paper tray failure  Paper pick mechanism    e If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the duplex paper path that  might cause the paper to jam  This includes the  paper guides in tray 1     If clearing the paper jam does not fix the  problem and the paper is fan folded  replace the  front access assembly  See    Front door  assembly removal    on page 4 55     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    Input sensor service check    on  page 2 52     Check for anything in the duplex paper path that  might cause the paper to jam  This includes the  paper guides in tray 1     If clearing a paper jam does not fix the problem   go to    146 xx   Motor  duplex  error service  check    on page 2 36     Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  used     Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Replace the paper tray     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  
196. ot followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     Warning  Be careful not to damage the printhead cable when removing the system card     1  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25    2  Disconnect all the connectors from the system card   Warning  Do not use tools to remove the printhead ribbon cable  A   It can be damaged and should be  removed gently by hand  When installing  carefully line up the cable  and press straight into the connector        Repair information 4 79    5022 xxx    3  Remove the screw  B  from the USB connector   4  For models C52x only  If a non network system card is installed  also remove the two screws  C  from the  parallel connector     Network system card Non network system card          ji     wik  kH   IFFT      l  j l  fi         d       l  t h    1 5  VE       fei    bes    es sa E T   SSeS  oe i a     P r          6  Remove the system card     4 80 Service Manual    5022 xxx    System card support shield removal    See    System card support shield  C52x    on page 7 9 or    System card support shield  C53x    on page 7 9  for the part number     Aa ed a    OND    Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Remove the left cover  See    Left cover removal    on page 4 20    Remove the LVPS  See    Low voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    on page 4 65    Remove the system card  See    System card removal    on page 4 79    Remove the five mounting screws  A  from the outer left si
197. ower supply  C53x    on page 7 11  for the part number     1  Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Remove the six mounting screws  A            4 62 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Disconnect the five connectors  C  from the HVPS                    C    Installation notes  Be sure to replace the spring when replacing the HVPS  See the illustration for proper  orientation        Wy  YYYYYY                 Repair information 4 63    5022 xxx    Left bellcrank removal    See    Left bellcrank assembly    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the left cover  See    Left cover removal    on page 4 20   2  Remove the C clip  A         g t A    A    3  Remove the left bellcrank     4 64 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Low voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    See    Low voltage power supply  115 230 V    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the right side cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   2  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25   3  Unplug the JLVPS1 connector  A  from the system card              4  Remove the five LVPS mounting screws  B    5  Disconnect the cable from the LVPS  C      JF ia       6  Remove the cable from the cable guide  and remove the LVPS     Repair information 4 65    5022 xxx    Installation note  When installing the new LVPS  make sure the voltage switch  D  is set for the proper  value  115 V or 230 V   depending on the country        4 66 Service
198. p access door   2  Open the front access door   3  Remove the three mounting screws  A         4  Remove the swing arm assembly from the frame     Installation note  Refer to the following illustration if the swing arm crank comes loose from the swing arm  assembly  Make sure the end of the spring  B  is under the retaining tab  C  on the swing arm crank after  installation     Note  Spring end  B  is shown disengaged from swing arm crank     ss    cuit            _  z gt     gt     A    A                        _     _     _           E         Repair information 4 67    5022 xxx    Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    Paper pick mechanism assembly  C52x    on page 7 5 or    Paper pick mechanism assembly  C53x     on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Remove the rear cover  See    Rear cover removal    on page 4 25   2  Disconnect the JTRAY1  A  and JTRAY2  B  connectors from the system card                                                Lr   A   N       A B  3  Remove all toner cartridges     4  For models C52x only  If installed  remove the MPF swing arm assembly  See    Multipurpose feeder   MPF  swing arm assembly removal   models C52x only    on page 4 67     4 68 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Remove the three mounting screws  C    6  Release the front locking tabs  D    7  Slide the paper pick mechanism forward until the rear locking tabs  E  release        8  Lower the paper pick mechanism  and remove through the front of the printer   Note  Make sure t
199. p aligner drive 3 38  duplex drive 3 41  fuser drive 3 40  paper pick mechanism drive 3 37  ophotoconductor unit toner cartridge drive 3 39  transfer belt drive 3 40  media  input and output capacities 1 12  selecting  preprinted forms and letterhead 1 7  storing 1 10  supported media size 1 10  Supported media weight 1 11  using  card stock 1 9  envelopes 1 8  labels 1 9    5022 xxx    letterhead 1 8  transparencies 1 8  media specifications  input and output capacities 1 12  print area 1 12  selecting media 1 6  supported sizes 1 10  using media 1 8  weight 1 12  memory 1 2  menus  accessing service menus 3 1  user menus 2 4  Mirror Motor Test 3 8  Model Name 3 16  models 1 1  7 1  Motor Calibration 3 24  Motor Calibration Test 3 9  motors  locations 5 9  MPF swing arm assembly   C52x  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 67  multipurpose feeder  MPF   swing arm assembly   C52x 4 67    O    operator panel  description 2 2  indicator light 2 2  locations 5 1  parts catalog 7 2  service check 2 53  display all diamonds  5 beeps 2 54  display all diamonds  no beeps 2 54  display blank  5 beeps  LED off 2 53  display blank  5 beeps  LED on 2 54  one or more buttons fail 2 53  options and features  description 1 1  parts catalog 7 20    P  Panel Menus 3 22  Panel Test 3 11  paper  selecting  preprinted forms and letterhead 1 7  storing 1 10  supported media weight 1 10  1 11  using  card stock 1 9  envelopes 1 8  labels 1 9  letterhead 1 8  paper jams  error locations 3 27  manual feede
200. page 4 26   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove all the toner cartridges    Remove the six inner screws  A      oS a       A A  6  Disconnect JCART1  B   JCART2  C   and JTRANS2  D  connectors from the drive assembly      0  j   j  F  k i     _    3       lt a     E i r  F i  k 5    4  i  j  j r ja  f     f  1 j  amp     ka     a x       Repair information 4 51    5022 xxx    7  Remove the nine outer screws  E    Note  Access the top two screws through the top cover        8  Remove the EP drive assembly from the printer     4 52 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation note  Ensure that the top access door is open and the EP drive is retracted when installing the new  EP drive assembly     Note  When retracted  upper  F  and lower retraction plates  G  will be fully forward  If not  slide the upper  retraction plate forward until the EP drive retracts and is disengaged from the developers        Repair information 4 53    5022 xxx    Front access door 5 V interlock switch removal    See    Front door 5 V interlock switch    on page 7 7 for the part number     1  Remove the LVPS  See    Low voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    on page 4 65   2  Disconnect the JINT1 connector  A  from the system card        3  Open the top access door   4  Remove the gearbox shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   5  Remove the interlock switch mounting screw  B  from the right side of the printer        B    6  Remove the cable from cable guide
201. page 4 68     Ensure the proper media is set for the type of  paper used    Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Properly set media restraints in paper tray     Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  worn     Replace the paper tray     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly removal    on  page 4 68        5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     frre  owen ma    241 05 While feeding from tray 1  the input Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper  sensor is never made  used   Possible causes  Fan media  and stack it flat in the tray or MPF   Incorrect media setting Properly set media restraints in paper tray   Incorrect paper loading Check the pick arm rolls  tires  and replace if  Incorrect media restraint setting oe    Replace the paper tray   Paper tray failure   l l    l l If the previous actions do not fix the problem  go  Paper pick mechanism failure to    140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error  e System card service check    on page 2 32   241 20 While feeding from tray 1  the Replace the paper tray   transparency sensor is blocked  If the previous action does not fix the problem   Possible causes  go to    910 01   Transparency sensor error  service check    on page 2 38   Transparency sensor  Paper tray failure  Paper pick mechanism failure  System card  241 21 Tray 1 motor stalled  Ensure proper media is set for the type of paper      used   Possible causes     Fan media  and
202. propery Go to step 3  Reseat the connector   connected to the system card     Place a voltmeter between JTRAY1 pin 2 and Replace the system card  Replace the paper pick  ground  Initially  the meter should indicate See    System card mechanism  See    Paper   5 V dc  Activate the input sensor flag  removal    on page 4 79  pick mechanism assembly  removal    on page 4 68     Does the voltage drop to 0 V dc        2 52 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Operator panel service check    Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Printhead assembly    Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     Warning  Never install and remove components listed above as a method of troubleshooting  components  Once a component has been installed in a printer  it cannot be used in another  printer  It must be returned to the manufacturer     One or more operator panel buttons fail    Run the Button Test  See    Button Test    on Replace the operator panel Go to step 2   page 3 11 in Diagnostics mode  assembly  See    Operator    l   anel assembly removal     Did any of the buttons fail the test  i page 4 23  y    Disconnect the operator panel assembly cable   Replace the operator panel Replace the system card   from JOPP1 on the system card  and measure   assembly  
203. r   C52x 4 21  7   parts catalog 7 2  removal 4 21   bin full sensor  Bin Full Test 3 15  parts catalog 7 12  removal   C52x 4 37  removal   C53x 4 38   Bin Full Test 3 15   Black Only Mode 3 21   bump aligner gear  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 39   bump aligner motor  locations 5 3  parts catalog 7 6  removal 4 40   Button Test 3 11   buttons  description 2 2  parts catalog  operator panel  7 2    2  2    5022 xxx    C  cables  parts catalog 7 18  CACHE Test 3 12  card stock 1 9  Color Alignment 3 24  Color Lock Out 3 21  Color Trapping 3 21  configuration ID 3 16  configuration menu  accessing 3 1  Auto Align Adj 3 23  Auto Color Adj 3 23  available tests 3 20  Color Alignment 3 24  Color Lock Out 3 21  Color Trapping 3 21  Demo Mode 3 22  Disk Encryption 3 25  Download Emuls 3 22  Duplex Gloss 3 25  Energy Conserve 3 23  Enforce Color Order 3 24  Env Prompts 3 25  Event Log 3 23  exit Config Menu 3 26  Factory Defaults 3 22  Font Sharpening 3 26  Jobs on Disk 3 25  Motor Calibration 3 24  Panel Menus 3 22  Paper Prompts 3 24  PPDS Emulation 3 22  Prt Quality Pages 3 21  Reset Fuser Cnt 3 21  Size Sensing 3 22  connectors 5 11  network system card 5 11  parallel system card 5 12  system card   models C52x  network  5 11  system card   models C52x  non network  5 12  system card   models C53x  network  5 18  contact springs  parts catalog 7 16  removal 4 44  covers  identification 4 14  locations 5 1  parts catalog 7 2    D  dead printer service check 2 51  defaults 3 16   E
204. r 3 28  multipurpose feeder 3 28    Index l 3    5022 xxx    paper path  diagram 3 30  3 31  main components 3 32  mechanical drive 3 37  paper sensing 3 42  print media transport 3 33  paper pick mechanism  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 68  Paper Prompts 3 24  paper sensing  paper exit duplex entry sensor and bin full flag 3 43  paper pick sensor 3 42  parts catalog  cable parts packet 7 18  contact springs 7 16  CRUs 7 14  front 7 4  left 7 10  miscellaneous 7 20  rear 7 8  right 7 6  top 7 12  Perm Page Count 3 16  ohotoconductor unit 4 2  handling 4 2  installation 4 70  locations 5 7  parts not to be touched 4 2  removal 4 70  transportation storage 4 2  Pick roll tires  replacement 4 71  power cords 7 15  power on self test  POST  sequence 2 5  PPDS Emulation 3 22  print area 1 12  print quality  background 2 55  blank page 2 56  blurred or fuzzy print 2 58  half color page 2 58  horizontal banding 2 58  horizontal line 2 58  insufficient fusing 2 58  missing image at edge 2 58  mottle  2   5mm speckles  2 58  narrow vertical line 2 58  random marks 2 59  residual image 2 59  solid color page 2 60  vertical banding 2 61  printer pads  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 73  printhead  locations 5 4  parts catalog 7 8  removal 4 74  printhead alignment 4 3    l 4 Service Manual    Prt Color Pg Count 3 16   Prt Mono Pg Count 3 16   Prt Quality Pgs  configuration menu 3 21  diagnostic menu 3 10    Q  Quick Test  duplex  3 12    R    removal and cleaning precautions 4 1  removals  
205. r belt  locations 5 7  parts catalog 7 14  removal 4 91  transfer contact assembly  locations 5 5  parts catalog 7 10  removal 4 92  Transfer Motor Test 3 8  transparencies  using 1 8    W    waste toner assembly  locations 5 7  removal 4 93    l 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Part number index    P N    40X0274  40X0275  40X0276  40X0278    40X0279  40X0280  40X0282  40X0286    40X0287  40X0288  40X0290  40X0291  40X0296  40X0297  40X1375  40X1376  40X1377  40X1378  40X1401  40X1404  40X1405  40X1409  40X1410  40X1411  40X1412  40X1413  40X1414  40X1415  40X1416  40X1417  40X1418  40X1419  40X1420  40X1422  40X1423  40X1424  40X1425  40X1426  40X1427  40X1428  40X1429  40X1430  40X1430  40X1431  40X1432  40X1433  40X1434  40X1435    Description Page  Power cord   Switzerland                                                 e e   ee 7 15  Power cord   lIsrael              escent e cree 7 15  Power cord   south Africa          5  05  485 ees en eters eee teeter hoes ees 7 15  Power cord   Austria  Belgium  Catalan  Czechoslovakia  Finland  France  Germany  Greece    Hungary  Ireland  Italy  Netherlands  Norway  Paraguay  Poland  Portugal  Russia  Spain  Sweden    Turkey  United Kingdom                                                           7 15  Power cord   Denmark  Finland  Norway  Sweden                                        7 15  OWE  COMO    hGled Sees eS oes eee tee tee Spek ee ee eee eee See ee ae SS 7 15  Power cord   China                                         e
206. r the image has been transferred onto the print media  it is ready for fusing  The print media is transported    into the fuser where the hot roll and backup roll use a combination of high heat and pressure to melt and press  the toner to the media        Backup roll    ek EFE        eh A LALA L P            kaS            5 F  N    B j    _____         3 52 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Cleaning    The transfer belt and photoconductor drum are cleaned at the end of the electrophotographic process cycle  The  transfer belt surface is cleaned as it rotates past a cleaning blade and shaft located inside the transfer belt  assembly  Any waste toner that is scraped off of the belt is collected in the waste toner container located next to  the belt inside the transfer belt unit     The photoconductor drum is cleaned by the cleaning blade     Photoconductor drum  cleaning blade    71         Transfer belt  cleaning blade       Transfer belt  waste toner  container    Transfer belt  cleaning shaft       Diagnostic aids 3 53    5022 xxx    Electrical interlock    5 V interlock switch    An interlock switch triggered by the front access door disables the  5 V output to the printhead which turns off  the laser          ip    a 7  Gearbox shield removed       5V interlock switch    3 54 Service Manual    5022 xxx    24 V interlock switch    The 24 V dc interlock switch is mounted to the right side of the top cover camshaft assembly  Opening the top  door rotates the drive retraction loc
207. re eee eee ee eee 7 15  Power cord   Austria  Belgium  Catalan  Czechoslovakia  Finland  France  Germany  Greece    Hong Kong  Hungary  Ireland  Italy  Netherlands  Norway  Paraguay  Poland  Portugal  Russia    Singapore  Spain  Sweden  Turkey  United Kingdom                                      7 15  Power cord   Chile  Uruguay                                                         7 15  Power cord   Argentina                                                                      7 15  Serial interface card adapter  C524 C524n C524dn  C534n C534dn                           7 20  Parallel 1284 B interface card adapter  C524 C524n C524dn  C534n  C534dn                    7 20  Power cord   Ausiralia  New Zealand              8 003 e re re ee rn te ee eee 7 15  Power cord   USA  Canada  Bolivia  Peru                                              7 15  MarkNet N8000 fast ethernet print server  C524 C524dn                                   7 20  MarkNet N8020 gigabit ethernet print server  C524 C524dn C534n C534dn                      7 20  MarkNet N8030 fiber ethernet print server  C524 C524dn C534 C534dn                        7 20  MarkNet N8050 802 11g wireless print server  US Americas   C524 C524dn C534n C534dn                 7 20  Transfer belt assembly  C52x               2 eee eect r re etree eee eeee 6 1  7 15  MPF paper tray assembly  250 sheet  C524 C524n C524dn                                 7 15  Paper pick mechanism assembly  052x                                   
208. registration makes sure the black printing is properly aligned on the page  This is one of the steps in  aligning a new printhead  See    Printhead alignment    on page 4 3  It is also the first step in aligning the duplex    registration  See    Quick Test  duplex     on page 3 12     The settings available are     Top Margin  Bottom Margin  Left Margin  Right Margin  Skew   Quick Test    To set print registration     1  Select REGISTRATION from the DIAGNOSTICS menu     2  Select Quick Test  and press Q    To print the Quick Test page     a  Press W until the y appears next to Quick Test     b  Press Q     The message Quick Test Printing   appears on the display     Retain this page to determine the changes you need to make to the margin settings     3  Use wor A to select the margin setting you need to change  and press D     4  Use  lt q to decrease or   gt  to increase the offset values  and press  y  to confirm the value     The message Submitting selection displays  and the original REGISTRATION screen appears with    the y beside the previously selected margin setting     The print registration range is     Description    Bottom margin    Top margin    Left margin    Right margin    Skew    3 4 Service Manual     20 to  20 Each increment causes  approximately 0 55 mm shift in the  bottom margin      25 to  25 Each increment  corresponds to 8 scans at a 600 dpi  scan rate  0 0133 inches or 0 339  mm       25 to  25 Each increment  corresponds to 4 pels at 600 dpi   0 00
209. rs if a hard disk is installed  It appears even if no buffered jobs exist on the hard disk     Selections include Do Not Delete and Delete     Disk Encryption    Controls whether the printer encrypts the information that it writes to the hard disk     Warning  When the value for Disk Encryption  the printer completely formats the hard disk which means that all  information on the disk is deleted     Note  If an encrypted disk is removed from the printer and another disk is installed  the Disk Corrupted   Reformat  message appears  The newly installed disk must either be formatted or removed from the printer     Selections include Disable  default  and Enable  When Disk Encryption is selected  Yes or No appears for you to  confirm  Select either Yes or No  and press Select to continue  To cancel  select No     The Disk Encryption menu item only appears when     e A non defective disk is installed in the printer   e The values of bits 3 2 of digit 4 in the Configuration ID 2 are either 01 for Supported  or 10 for Supported  with an internal network adapter  INA      A graphic appears  showing     e The message Encrypting Diskor Formatting Disk  e A percentage scale  e The message DO NOT POWER OFF    The process is complete when the percentage scale displays 100   Duplex Gloss  Generates higher quality duplex copies than when using the normal duplex mode  The major difference between    normal duplex and duplex gloss mode is the number of sheets in the duplex print media path  N
210. rt  running the width of the media  For 60 to 90 g m   16 to 24 Ib bond  media   use grain long fibers     Fiber content    Most high quality xerographic media is made from 100  chemically treated pulped wood  This content provides  the media with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer media feeding problems and better print quality  Media  containing fibers such as cotton possesses characteristics that can negatively affect media handling     1 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Unacceptable media    The following media types are not recommended for use with the printer     e Chemically treated media used to make copies without carbon paper  also known as carbonless papers   carbonless copy paper  CCP   or no carbon required  NCR  paper   e Preprinted media with chemicals that may contaminate the printer   e Preprinted media that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser   e Preprinted media that requires a registration  the precise print location on the page  greater than  2 3 mm    0 09 in    such as optical character recognition  OCR  forms  In some cases  registration can be adjusted with a program to successfully print on these forms    e Coated media  erasable bond   synthetic media  thermal media   e Rough edged  rough  or heavily textured surface media  or curled media   e Recycled media containing more than 25  post consumer waste that does not meet DIN19 309   e Media weighing less than 60 g m   16 Ib    e Multiple part forms or documents    Selec
211. rt shield removal    on page 4 81   6  Remove the fuser cable cover  See    Fuser cable cover removal    on page 4 61     4 74 Service Manual    5022 xxx    T  Remove the three mounting screws  C  from the front of the printhead   Warning  Secure the printhead when removing the printhead alignment screw  Failure to do this allows  the printhead to fall out of the printer  potentially damaging the printhead        8  Close the top access cover and remove the printhead alignment screw  D   and remove the printhead        Repair information 4 75    5022 xxx    Installation notes     Do not install the printhead mounting screws in the rear of the printer  When reinstalling the printhead  it is  important to keep in mind that the printhead mounting screws should be initially tightened just enough to hold the  printhead in the printer  This allows the pages to be printed that will be used to align the black plane to the printer  frame and also allows skew adjustment with the printhead alignment screw  Once the black skew is adjusted  the  mounting screws will be fully tightened     1  When installing the printhead  do a rough alignment by visually centering the hole in the frame  C  with the  slot on the bottom of the printhead  Do not fully tighten printhead mounting screws until skew has been  adjusted        2  Align the printhead  See    Printhead alignment    on page 4 3     4 76 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Right bellcrank removal    See    Right bellcrank assembly    on pag
212. s  C   For model C534  remove cables  C  and the USB cable  D      Models C52x Models C53x   Model C534 shown   B       Repair information 4 23    5022 xxx    Paper tray dust cover removal    See    Paper tray dust cover with dust cover spring  C53x    on page 7 3 for the part number     Unplug the power cord from the printer    Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15   Remove the paper tray    Place the printer on its back     eee YT    Remove the paper tray dust cover assembly     i   6    na   7  ee                  T               A B       C D    8  Set the dust cover bracket aside to reuse with the new FRU     4 24 Service Manual    Remove the four screws  A   The upper right screw can be accessed through a hole in the frame  B      5022 xxx    Rear cover removal    See    Rear cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     1  Loosen the eight screws  A    Note  Do not remove the screws     2  Lift up on the rear cover  and slide to the right to remove from the back of the printer        Repair information 4 25    5022 xxx    Right cover removal    See    Right cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     Make sure the power cord is removed    Place the printer on the table with the right side edge hanging over slightly   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove the three screws  A      Se       B  6  Lift the bottom of the cover out  and slide the right cover down to remove the cover     4 26 Service Manual    5022 xxx
213. s 5 13    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C52x   see    System card  network    models C52x    on page 5 11 or    System card  non network    models C52x    on  page 5 12   continued     Connector    JHVPS1 Ground  C DEVPWM  Y DEVPWM   Ground  HV_EMPTY_C  HV_EMPTY_Y   HV _CHRG_PWM  HV_XFER_PWM_C  HV_XFER_PWM_M  HV _XFER_PWM_Y  CORE_CURR_SNSD  HV_XFER_PWM_K  VS_JINT 1   5V_SW   Ground   VS_INT   5V_PH    5 Vdc    5 Vdc   LVPS ZERO_XING   24 V dc   Ground   Ground   Ground  LVPS_BRON  MM_REF  MM_LOCK  MM_START  Ground    24 V dc  VS_JOPT 1   5V_SW   S_OPT_ENC  Ground    24VC   OPT_PLEV    V_24VD  M DEVPWM  K DEVPWM   5V_ SW  HV_EMPTY_M  HV_EMPTY_K  TONER_CHK  XFER_SERVO_C  XFER_SERVO_M  XFER_SERVO_Y  HVPS_ID  XFER_SERVO K    10  12  14  16  18  20  22  24    11  13  15  17  19  21  3    N    JINT1    JLVPS1  5 V dc   5 V dc   24 V dc   24 V dc  Ground  Ground  Ground    LVPS_HRON    10  12  14  16    1  13  15    JMIRR1    JOPT1 2 OPTION PWM  OPT_TYPE  Ground  OPT_PSIZE    OPT_PCTL    pD    10    5 14 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Connector listing   models C52x   see    System card  network    models C52x    on page 5 11 or    System card  non network    models C52x    on  page 5 12   continued     Connector    JOPP1 1    JPH1   10  11  12  13  14  15  16  17  18  19  20  21  22  23  24  25  26  2   28  29  3    I2C_DATA5 OP  V_PANEL 5V  lI2C_CLK_OP  Ground  I2CIRQ5_R    3 3 V dc   Ground   Ground  D_VDO_M   D_VDO_M   Ground   D_VDO_C    D VDO C   Ground  PH_EMS1_SNS R 
214. s continuity present        Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Replace the system card   page 4 60  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     7   Check for continuity between the following pins   Go to step 8  Replace the AC fuser cable    of the AC autoconnect and the pins of the  i connector that connects to the LVPS   vl     pin 1 ad   LVPS connector  AC autoconnect     Is continuity present        Diagnostic information 2 29    5022 xxx    120 03   Fuser error service check    Check the input voltage switch on the back of Go to step 2  Set the switch for proper the  the low voltage power supply  LVPS   country voltage     Is the voltage level  115 230  properly set     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the fuser cable  Go to step 3   Check the connector JFUSER1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage    Is the cable damaged    Check the connector JLVPS1 for proper Replace the LVPS  See Go to step 4   connection to the system card  the cable for    Low voltage power   pinch points  and the cable or connector for supply  LVPS  removal      any other damage  on page 4 65    Is the cable damaged     Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Replace the system card   page 4 60  See    System card    Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79     Check the input voltage switch on the back of
215. sed to help correct print quality problems     To restore EP Defaults     1  Select EP Defaults from EP SETUP     2  Select Restore to reset the values to the factory settings  and select Do Not Restore to exit without  changing the settings     Fuser Temperature  Fuser Temp     This adjustment can be used to help solve some customer problems with paper curl on low grade papers and  problems with letterheads on some types of media     The fuser temperature can be adjusted to  Low  Normal  High  The default is Normal   DC Charge Adjust  Dev Bias Adj  Transfer Adjust    Each of these three settings enables you to adjust the high voltage levels controlling the electrophotographic  process  You will use these settings to compensate for unusual operating circumstances such as high humidity   The printer uses the value of these settings together with other settings to calculate printing speed and media  selection     Diagnostic aids 3 17    5022 xxx    Event Log    Display Log    The event log provides a history of printer errors  It contains the 12 most recent errors that have occurred on the  printer  The most recent error displays in position 1  and the oldest error displays in position 12  if 12 errors have  occurred   If an error occurs after the log is full  the oldest error is discarded  Identical errors in consecutive  positions in the log are entered  so there may be repetitions  All 2xx and 9xx error messages are stored in the  event log     To view the event log     1  S
216. sembly   Paper pick mechanism assembly  C52x  Paper pick mechanism assembly  C53x       Bump aligner roller and spring    Parts catalog 7 5    5022 xxx    Assembly 3  Right       7 6 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 3  Right    Units    Units  Description  mach   FRU p    40X1409 EP drive assembly  C52x  40X3578 EP drive assembly  C53x    40X3574 Low voltage power supply  115 230 V  40X1433 Bump aligner motor   40X1436 Front door 5 V interlock switch  40X1445 Ground contact plate  C52x only       Parts catalog 7 7    5022 xxx    Assembly 4  Rear       7 8 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Assembly 4  Rear    Units    Units  nasenption  mach   FRU p    40X1417 Printhead assembly  C52x  40X3589  40X4218  40X4219  40X4217  40X3575  40X3576  40X3577  40X1429  40X3597  40X1410    Printhead assembly  C53x   System card  network   C524n C524dn   System card  network   C520n C522n   System card  C524   System card  network   C530dn C532n C532dn  System card  network   C534n   System card  network   C534dn   System card support shield  C52x   System card support shield  C53x       ee ee a a ee ae 4  ee ee a a a ee 4    i  2  2  2  2  2  2  3  3  4    Smart chip card  C52x only    Parts catalog 7 9    5022 xxx    Assembly 5  Left          i i  t p  i    i A  g       rl    NN        x     a  Z ai  se J wP E  rig  t   3  t   A    n    3    a   F  s m see         it         rth  pa a er  a d  A _ sh  a      a  F  Ae h  sra a      i   a a Hb  aai  k  ha  e  4 t W    ka    Pw L  x Sm    i
217. ser straight up and away from the printer        B    Installation note  If you install a new fuser  be sure to reset the fuser counter in the Configuration Menu  To  reset the counter     1   2   3   4     Enter the Configuration Menu   Turn off the printer  press and hold and p  turn on the printer  and  release the buttons when the clock graphic displays     Press  Y  for the Reset value    Resetting Fuser Count Value appears    Press    to select Motor Calibration from the CONFIG MENU  Calibrating displays  and the printer  prints several blank pages and then returns to the CONFIG MENU    Select Exit Config Menu     See    Page Counts    on page 3 16     4 60 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Fuser cable cover removal    See    Fuser cable cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X1430   C52x    on page 7 5 or    Fuser cable  cover  included in parts packet  P N 40X3598   C53x    on page 7 5 for the part number     a    Open the top access door   Open the front access door   Remove the yellow and cyan toner cartridges     Pull the locking tab  A  down on the left side of the cable cover  B   slide the cable to left  lower and  remove        Repair information 4 61    5022 xxx    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    See    High voltage power supply  C52x    on page 7 11 or    High voltage power supply  C53x    on page 7 11  for the part number     1  Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Remove the six mounting screws  A    
218. sh drive to send data to the printer     Numeric keypad Model C534 only  Consists of the numbers 0 9  a backspace button              and a pound     button   O       O        0o00       Diagnostic information 2 3    5022 xxx    Menus    Note  Some menu items may not be available based on the printer model or the options installed     Supplies Menu  Replace Supply  Cyan Cartridge  Magenta Cartridge  Yellow Cartridge  Black Cartridge  Cyan PC Unit  Magenta PC Unit  Yellow PC Unit  Black PC Unit  Waste Toner Box  Fuser   Transfer Belt    Security  Max Invalid PIN  Job Expiration    2 4 Service Manual    Paper Menu  Default Source  Paper Size Type  Configure MP  Substitute Size  Paper Texture  Paper Weight  Paper Loading  Custom Types  Universal Setup    Network Ports  TCP IP   IPv6   Wireless  Standard Network  Network  lt x gt   Standard USB  USB  lt x gt   NetWare   Apple Talk  LexLink    IICD Mirant    Reports   Menu Settings Page  Device Statistics  Network Setup Page  Network  lt x gt  Setup Page  Wireless  lt x gt  Setup Page  Profiles List   NetWare Setup Page  Print Fonts   Print Demo    Help   Color Quality  Print Quality  Printing Guide  Supplies Guide  Media Guide  Print Defects  Menu Map  Information Guide  Connection Guide  Moving Guide    Settings   Setup Menu  Finishing Menu  Quality Menu  Utilities Menu  PDF Menu  PostScript Menu  PCL Emul Menu  HTML Menu  Image Menu    5022 xxx    Power on self test  POST  sequence    When you turn the printer on  it performs a
219. solved  Replace the system card     supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62  See    System card  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        Diagnostic information 2 49    5022 xxx    950 00 950 29 EPROM mismatch failure    Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Printhead assembly    Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     Warning  Never install and remove components listed above as a method of troubleshooting components   Once a component has been installed in a printer  it cannot be used in another printer  It must be  returned to the manufacturer     This error code indicates a mismatch between the operator panel assembly and the system card     Has the operator panel assembly been Replace the operator panel Replace the system card  recently replaced  assembly with a new  and with a new  and not    not previously installed previously installed system  operator panel assembly  card  See    System card  See    Operator panel removal    on page 4 79   assembly removal    on   page 4 23        950 30    950 60 EPROM mismatch failure    Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Printhead assembly    Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required co
220. sted        2  Align the printhead  See    Printhead alignment    on page 4 3     4 76 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Right bellcrank removal    See    Right bellcrank assembly    on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Open the front access cover   2  Remove the gearbox switch shield  See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19   3  Remove the C clip  A         4  Remove the right bellcrank     Repair information 4 77    5022 xxx    Smart chip card removal   models C52x only    See    Smart chip card  C52x only    on page 7 9 for the part number     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the system card support shield  See    System card support shield removal    on page 4 81   2  From the outside right of the printer  disconnect the five connectors  A    3  Remove the two mounting screws  B   and remove the smart chip card          Pe     e        da    ry ed      4 78 Service Manual    5022 xxx    System card removal    See the system card part number for the model you need on page 7 9     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or print
221. stions   actions    Read the current status of the photoconductor   Reset the value  To reset Go to step 2   unit from the customer menus  this value     To view the status of the photoconductor units    In Ready mode  press    1  ln Ready mode  press e    2  Select Reports  and press      3  Select Device Statistics  and press            Select Supplies Menu   and press        l i   Select Replace Supply   Ask the customer if the photoconductor unit and press        has been recently replaced  It is possible the  photoconductor value was not reset and the  photoconductor unit is past end of life  If the E onanger ang  PC unit was recently replaced  reset the value    If the PC unit was not replaced  replace the PC   a Yes  and press  unit       Select the PC color unit      If this does not fix the  Has the photoconductor unit been recently problem  go to step 2     replaced        Diagnostic information 2 55    5022 xxx    Replace the PC unit  See    Photoconductor Problem solved  Go to step 3   unit removal    on page 4 70     Does this fix the problem     Check the high voltage contact from the HVPS   Replace the spring or the Go to step 4   to the transfer belt assembly  transfer contact assembly   See    Transfer contact  Transfer belt high voltage assembly removal    on    path  typical 4X  page 4 92     l Is a problem found   Reseat the JHVPS connector  Problem solved  Go to step 5   Does this fix the problem   Replace the HVPS  See    High voltage power   Problem sol
222. switch for proper  the low voltage power supply  LVPS   country voltage     Is the voltage level  115 230  properly set     Remove the fuser  and check the camshaft Go to step 3  Press the camshaft follower  follower on the right side  If the camshaft into the groove    follower  A  is above the crescent shaped   groove  it needs to be pressed down into the   proper location    Is the camshaft follower on the right side   properly placed in the groove     Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the fuser cable  Go to step 4   Check the connector JFUSER1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Check the connector JLVPS1 for proper Replace the LVPS cable  Go to step 5   connection to the system card  the cable for See    Low voltage power   pinch points  and the cable or connector for supply  LVPS  removal      any other damage  on page 4 65     Is the cable damaged   Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Replace the appropriate Go to step 6   page 4 60  Check the AC and DC cable     autoconnects on both the fuser and the printer  for damage     Are the connectors damaged        2 28 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Check for the following continuity between the   Go to step 7  Replace the DC fuser cable   DC autoconnect and FUSER1     I  mal  3  517  9   rag 2 141618  10    configuration    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    I
223. t  R  Fine Adjustment    54  Coarse      300 0 300    240    42    30                        0    T    New  Cyan  R value    Note  Start each color group by setting the Top Margin  Left Margin  Right Margin  Bottom Margin  Skew     and Bow to zero     4 12 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Printer removal procedures    Precautions to take before maintenance work    Do not implement any operation  removal  or modification and so on  which is not presented in this manual     1  Turn the printer power off and unplug the power cable from the outlet prior to starting  AN removals or checks        2  Prior to starting any repairs  read and understand the warnings in this manual   e High temperature  e High voltage  e Laser radiation  Confirm the direction of all parts and screw lengths during removal replacement   Utilize the proper cleaning procedures solvents during maintenance   Confirm that all parts and covers are properly installed and assembled prior to starting the print test     ae    Repair information 4 13    5022 xxx    Cover removals  Outer bezel  C52X     Bezel  C53X               Inner bezel  C52X     Operator Panel   C52X        Exit tray  cover Rear  cover    Top access cover  assembly    Front access cover    Paper tray dust cover   with spring     4 14 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Exit tray cover removal    See    Exit tray cover  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number     Grasp the exit tray  and lift away from printer        Repair information 4 15    5022 xxx   
224. t Cartridges  40   C to  40   C  104   Fahrenheit     Air Relative Humidity Relative Humidity 8 to 80   Altitude 10 300 meters  34 000 feet     Web Bulb Temperature   Product Power Off 26 7   C  80 1   F  Maximum    T In some cases performance specifications  such as paper OCF  EP cartridge usage  are specified to be  measured at an ambient condition        Acoustics    All measurements are made in accordance with ISO 7779 and conform with ISO 9296     1 Meter Average Declared Sound  Operating mode Bystander Sound Power Level  4800  Pressure  4800 CQ CQ    C524dn  C524dtn 52 dBA  mwe o fea    C520n  C522n  C524n    C532n  C534n Color printing 51 dBA  Color printing 51 dBA  C530dn  C534dn  C534dtn    Duplex printing 53 dBA       1 4 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Dimensions    Basic printer with no C520  C522n  C524  C524n  19 in  17 3 in  16 1 in  57 5 Ib  extensions C524dn  484 mm   440 mm   408 mm   26 1 kg   C532n  C534n 19 in  17 3 in  16 1 in  57 0 Ib   484 mm   440 mm   408 mm   25 9 kg          C530dn  C532dn  C534dn 19 in    17 3 in 16 1 in  58 8 Ib   484 mm  440 mm  408 mm   26 7 kg   Printer with exit tray C520  C522n  C524  C524n 19 in  17 3 in  20 2 in  57 5 Ib  extended  484 mm   440 mm   512 mm   26 1 kg   C532n  C534n 19 in  17 3 in  20 2 in  57 0 Ib   484 mm   440 mm   512 mm   25 9 kg   C530dn  C524dn  C534dn 19 in  17 3 in  20 2 in  58 8 Ib   484 mm   440 mm   512 mm   26 7 kg   Printer  duplex unit  C524dtn 24 in  17 3 in  22 in  64 8 Ib  500 sheet assembly 
225. t See    Quick Test  duplex     on page 3 12     Print Test See    Print Test  duplex     on page 3 13    Top Margin See    Top Margin  duplex     on page 3 14    Motor Test See    Motor Test  duplex     on page 3 14   INPUT TRAY TESTS  if Tray 2 is installed    Tray 2 See    Input Tray Tests    on page 3 14     BASE SENSOR TEST    Bin Full Test See    Bin Full Test    on page 3 15     Sensor Test See    Sensor Test    on page 3 15   PRINTER SETUP  Defaults see    Defaults    on page 3 16     PAGE COUNTS This menu contains three submenus  Prt Color Pg Count  Mono Pg Count   and Perm Page Count  See    Page Counts    on page 3 16     Serial Number See    Serial Number    on page 3 16    Engine Setting 1 through 4 See    Engine Setting 1 through 4    on page 3 16    Model Name See    Model Name    on page 3 16    Configuration ID See    Configuration ID    on page 3 16    EP Defaults See    EP Defaults    on page 3 17    Fuser Temp See    Fuser Temperature  Fuser Temp     on page 3 17    DC Charge Adjust  Dev Bias Adj  Transfer Adjust    EVENT LOG    Display Log See    Display Log    on page 3 18     See    DC Charge Adjust  Dev Bias Adj  Transfer Adjust    on page 3 17        Print Log see    Print Log    on page 3 18   Clear Log see    Clear Log    on page 3 19     EXIT DIAGNOSTICS This selection exits Diagnostics mode  and Resetting the Printer       displays  The printer performs a POR  and returns to normal mode     Diagnostic aids 3 3    5022 xxx    Registration    Print 
226. t during  printing        Duplex motor Drive shafts Bottom view Belt  of motor and    gear    Diagnostic aids 3 41    5022 xxx    Paper sensing    Sensors are strategically placed in the printer to ensure that the print media is making it to specific points within  a given time in the electrophotographic process  There are two paper flags  one at the bottom of the machine   paper pick  to detect input paper  including duplex second side  from all sources and one at the top  paper exit   to detect paper movement beyond the fuser  The flags are similar in design  in that a mechanical arm is moved  by the media to interrupt an optical sensor  both are normally blocked when no media is present  There is also a  multifunction transparency sensor that detects if  1  tray 1 is present  2  narrow media is being used  and 3  the  media is a transparency  The sensor works for tray 1  tray 2  500 sheet option   and the MPF     Paper pick sensor    Paper pick mechanism          Multifunction  transparency sensor    Input sensor    3 42 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Paper exit duplex entry sensor and bin full flag    The top sensor detects movement in two directions  as the paper exits the fuser and as it is retracted from the   exit tray back into the duplex path  Each sheet must be driven past the fuser exit flag and allowed to fall before  being turned around and starting the duplex path  If the print media activates the paper exit flag for too long  or  the print media doesn t reach t
227. t is difficult to press both locking tabs at the same time  Using a spring hook   press the locking tab  A   and disengage the sensor on that side  Press the other locking tab  B    and remove the sensor                 4 84 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Top access door 24 V interlock switch removal    See    Top access door 24 V interlock switch    on page 7 13 for the part number     1  Remove the top access cover assembly  See    Top access cover assembly removal   model C52x only     on page 4 28   2  Disconnect the JCVR1 connector  A  from the system card        3  Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26   4  Remove the mounting screw  B  and 24 V interlock switch  C         Repair information 4 85    5022 xxx    Top cover camshaft assembly removal    See    Top cover camshaft assembly    on page 7 13 for the part number     1         90    eo A PD    Remove the top access door 24 V interlock switch  See    Top access door 24 V interlock switch  removal    on page 4 85    Remove the left cover  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21    Rotate the lever arm  A  all the way up as if the top access door were open  hold the lever arm  A  in place   and rotate the camshafts  B  down to the closed position    While still holding the lever arm  A  up  remove the left front mounting screw  C  and flip the right lock  D   back    Continue to hold the lever arm  A  up  and remove the right front mounting screw  E   release the lever ar
228. t tray cover removal    See    Exit tray cover  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number     Grasp the exit tray  and lift away from printer        Repair information 4 15    5022 xxx    Front access door cover assembly removal    See Front access door cover assembly for the part number for the models you need on page 7 3     Remove the paper tray    Remove the right cover  See    Right cover removal    on page 4 26    Disconnect the transfer belt cable  A     Press the two tabs  B  on either side of the transfer belt assembly  and lift out the transfer belt assembly   Note  Leave the photoconductor units on the transport belt when removing     m ade a    Warning  To avoid damaging the photoconductor drum  hold the photoconductor units by their handle and  place the photoconductor units on a clean surface  Never expose the photoconductor units to light for a  prolonged period of time  See    Handing the photoconductor unit    on page 4 2 for additional  information     Model C52x Model C53x       4 16 Service Manual    5022 xxx    5  Looking down at the keyed end of the restraint  C   twist the end clockwise  slide the restraint upward  through the slit  D   and slip the end of the restraint through the keyed hole  E   Repeat for the other side     ol       6  Close the front access door     Repair information 4 17    5022 xxx    T  Remove the four screws  F  that attach the pivot pin to the front access door cover        8  Remove the front access cover assembly     4 18 Serv
229. t triggers the paper exit sensor  it serves as a one way gate for  the media when it is exiting the printer to the output bin and also serves as a one way gate when the media is  entering back into the printer for a duplex print  In other words  it diverts the print media s path  directing it to    either the output bin or the duplex paper path     3 36 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Mechanical drive    In order for the print media to move through the paper path  there are several drive motors that supply the  mechanical power to the rollers discussed previously  The drives for these components are illustrated and  discussed in the following paragraphs     Paper pick mechanism drive    When printing from Tray 1 or Tray 2  the paper pick motor drives the paper pick gears which causes the pick  roller to turn  During an MPF print  the paper pick motor drives the swing arm assembly for the MPF and causes  the MPF paper pick roller to turn             MPF paper pick    Swing arm  bracket   C52x     MPF swing arm  assembly    Paper pick  mechanism gears    Paper pick motor    Paper tray and paper pick mechanism shown  from rear with components removed for clarity    Paper pick  mechanism    Diagnostic aids 3 37    5022 xxx    Bump aligner drive    The power to turn the bump aligner roll is supplied from the bump aligner motor  The motor drives a set of bump  aligner gears which causes the bump aligner roll to turn     Bump aligner roll Bump aligner gears Bump aligner gears       Bu
230. t was just replaced  and then press        lt color gt  PC Unit Replaced displays    Press    to select Yes     4 70 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Pick roll rubber tires removal and replacement    See    Pick arm roll    on page 7 15 for the part number     The autocompensator pick roll tires are located in the base printer  There are also tires in all input options  If you  have additional input options  and you are having problems with media picking  replace these tires also  Always  replace the pick tires in pairs  The tires come in a package of two        Warning  Remove only the rubber tires and not the pick tire assembly to avoid losing small parts     1  Remove the paper tray   2  Pull the autocompensator pick arm  A  down        Repair information 4 71    5022 xxx    3  Remove the rubber tire  B  from the pick roll assembly  C   Repeat for the other pick roll assembly        ome  B C B    Installation notes  Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture  D  turning in the direction as shown     Note  Feel the rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown                    4 72 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Printer pad removal    See    Printer pad  included in parts packet   screws  P N 40X1431     on page 7 5 for the part number     1  Slide the corner of the printer containing the damaged pad over the corner of the table   2  Pull the pad  A  from the bottom of the printer        Installation Note  When installing the new pad  remove the
231. talog 7 6  removal   C52x 4 48  removal   C53x 4 51  electrophotographic  EP  process 3 44  charging 3 46  cleaning 3 53  developing 3 50  exposing 3 49  fusing 3 52  main components 3 44  transferring 3 51  Energy Conserve 3 23  Enforce Color Order 3 24  engine setting 3 16  Env Prompts 3 25  envelopes 1 8  error codes and messages  1xx service error codes 2 7 2 8  9xx service error codes 2 15 2 18  error codes and messages2xx paper jams 2 8 2 15  error codes and messages3x    8x attendance messages  2 19    2 26  ESD sensitive parts 4 1  event log  configuration menu 3 23  diagnostics mode 3 18  exit sensor  service check 2 52    F  Factory Defaults 3 22  Font Sharpening 3 26  front door assembly  front cable removal 4 59  parts catalog 7 4  removal 4 55  fuser  locations 5 7  motor test 3 8  parts catalog 7 14    removal 4 60  Reset Fuser Cnt 3 21  Fuser Motor Test 3 8    H    high voltage power supply  HVPS   locations 5 5  parts catalog 7 10  removal 4 62   how to use this parts catalog 7 1    J   jams  common messages  diagram  3 27  paper jam messages 2 8  paper path 3 30   Jobs on Disk 3 25    L   labels 1 9   locations  cards 5 10  covers 5 1  CRUs and FRUs 5 7  front 5 2  left 5 5  machine type label 1 13  motors 5 9  printer cards 5 10  rear 5 4  right 5 3  sensors 5 8  serial number label 1 13  top 5 6   low voltage power supply  LVPS   locations 5 3  parts catalog 7 6  removal 4 65    machine type tag location 1 13  maintenance approach 1 1  mechanical drive  bum
232. ted  the printer lets users place each toner cartridge in only its specified slot  For instance  the  Magenta toner cartridge must be in the Magenta slot  If the user tries to place a cartridge in an incorrect slot  the  printer message 31 Defective or Missing  color  Cartridge or32 Unsupported  color   Cartridge appears where  colo  stands for Cyan  Magenta  Yellow  or Black     When Off is selected  the printer does not issue any message to let the user know that the cartridge is placed in  the wrong slot inside the printer     Color Alignment    Prints the Print Alignment Page and requires that the best line in each set of lines must be selected   Press Select to begin printing     Consulting the printed page  follow the instructions on the operator panel to choose the best appearing line  numbered 0 through 20 for the following sets of lines  These includes Set A  Set B  and so forth through Set L   For each of the sets listed  the sub value is 0   20  10 is the default      Motor Calibration    Allows for speed calibration after resetting the fuser maintenance counter   To calibrate the motors     Press    to select Motor Calibration from the CONFIG MENU  Calibrating displays  and the printer prints  several blank pages and then returns to the CONFIG MENU     Paper Prompts    Controls the source the printer selects for a change paper source message  The printer displays the change  paper source message based on the size of the paper requested and not by the paper type   
233. ter  If the  error message persists  see    120 01  120 02   120 08   120 10  120 13   120 15    Fuser error  service check    on page 2 28     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     140 xx   Autocomp  tray 1  motor error service  check    on page 2 32     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     142 xx and 906 01   906 04    Motor  fuser  error  service check    on page 2 33     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     143 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly top  cartridge  error service check    on page 2 34     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     144 xx   Motor  EP drive assembly bottom  cartridge  error service check    on page 2 35     POR the printer  If the error message persists  see     145 xx and 906 05   906 08   Motor  bump  aligner  error service check    on page 2 36        Diagnostic information 2 7    5022 xxx    Service error codes and paper jam messages  continued     moe  Omen a    146 01   146 08 Motor  Error    147 01    147 08 Motor  Error    148 01    148 08 Motor  Error    149 01    149 08 Motor  Error    2xx paper jam messages    200 01    200 11  200 16    200 21    2 8 Service Manual    Duplex motor has failed     Tray 2 motor has failed     MPF motor has failed     Tray 2 motor has failed     Input sensor is made when printer  tries to print from an idle state     Possible causes     e Paper jam leaving page over  sensor    e Defective input sensor  e Faulty system card    Input sensor do
234. test  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the damaged Go to step 2   Check the connector JTRANS2  model C52x  cable    or JTRANS1  model C53x  for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Replace the EP drive assembly  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Electrophotographic  EP  drive assembly See    System card  removal   model C52x only    on page 4 48  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        2 38 Service Manual    5022 xxx    920 04   POST  power on self test  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the fuser cable  Go to step 2   Check the connector JFUSER1 for proper   connection to the system card  the cable for   pinch points  and the cable or connector for   any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Remove the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Replace the DC Go to step 3   page 4 60  Check the DC autoconnects on autoconnect cable    both the fuser and the printer for damage    Are the connectors damaged     Check for the following continuity between the   Go to step 4  Replace the DC fuser cable   DC autoconnect and FUSER1     mel  3  5 7  9    rag 2141618  10    configuration    DC autoconnect JFUSER1    Is continuity present     Replace the fuser  See    Fuser removal    on Problem solved  Replace the system card   See    System card    remo
235. the outer bezel  insert the bottom of the bezel first  ensuring  that the outer bezel bottom portion fully seats        Repair information 4 21    5022 xxx    Operator panel inner bezel removal   models C52x only    See the part number for the inner bezel for the model you need on page 7 3     1  Remove the outer bezel  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Press the top of the inner bezel to release the inner bezel  A  from the outer bezel   3  Gently twist to free the lower tabs  B         4 22 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Operator panel assembly removal    See    Operator panel assembly  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number  See the same page for the individual  part numbers for the C53x models     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the outer bezel  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Remove the screw  A      5       A    3  Disengage the upper locking tabs  B    4  Disconnect the cables  C   For model C534  remove cables  C  and the USB cable  D      Models C52x Models C53x   Model C534 shown   B       Repair information 4 23    5022 xxx    Paper tray dust cover remo
236. ther damage   Is the cable damaged    3    Disconnect JHVPS1 from the system card and    the HVPS  Check for the following continuity     JHVPS1 cable HVPS end  System card end    Is continuity present           Replace the top access  cover assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Go to step 2     Go to step 3     Replace the top access  cover assembly  See    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C52x  only    on page 4 28 or    Top  access cover assembly  removal   model C53x  only    on page 4 32     Replace the damaged  sensor  See    Toner level  sensor removal    on  page 4 83     Go to step 4     Diagnostic information 2 41    5022 xxx    Reconnect JHVPS1 cable to the system card Replace the toner level Go to step 5   and the HVPS  Do not reinstall the left cover  sensor that has 5 V dc on   but make sure the front access door and the pin 1  See    Toner level   top cover assembly are closed  and that the sensor removal    on   waste toner assembly is reinstalled  Turn the page 4 83    printer on  Attach the negative end of the   voltmeter to the ground  and check the voltage   on pin 1 of each toner level sensor cable  You   will need to check this on the back of the HVPS    see the illustration below      Pin1  typical  Negative lead Waste toner  4X assembly    Is there approximately 5 V dc on any of the  pins     Replace the HVPS  Se
237. ting media    Using appropriate media prevents jams and helps ensure trouble free printing   To help avoid jams and poor print quality     e Always use new  undamaged media     e Before loading media  know the recommended print side of the media  This information is usually indicated  on the media package     e Do not use media that has been cut or trimmed by hand   e Do not mix media sizes  types  or weights in the same source  mixing results in jams   e Do not use coated media unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing     Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead    Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead     e Use grain long papers for best results for 60 to 90 g m  weights   e Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process   e Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces     Use papers printed with heat resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers  The ink must be able to  withstand temperatures up to 180  C  856   F  without melting or releasing hazardous emissions  Use inks that  are not affected by the resin in toner  Inks that are oxidation set or oil based generally meet these requirements   latex inks might not  When in doubt  contact the paper supplier     Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 180  C  356   F  without  melting or releasing hazardous emissions     General information 1 7    5022 xxx  
238. tings  Page Count XX Top Margin  x  PSAC XX Bottom Margin  x  Installed Memory xxx MB Left Margin  x  Processor Speed xxxMHZz Right Margin  x  Serial Number XXXXXXX Skew  x  CalStat XXXX Cyan Top Margin  x  CalSet X XX X XX X XX Cyan Left Margin   XX  X XX X XX Cyan Right Margin   x  Engine ID XX Cyan Skew  X  FSpeed XXX Cyan Bow  x  Printer Revision Levels Yellow Top Margin   x  Loader XX XX XXXX X Yellow Left Margin   x  Kernel XXX XX XXXX X Yellow Right Margin   x  Base XX XX XXXX X Yellow Skew  X  Network XXX XX XXXXX X Yellow Bow  X  Network Drvr XX XX XXXX X Magenta Top Margin    Engine XX XX XXXX X o ee    Font X XXXXX XX X agenta Rig argin   H 1  Magen Skew ae Right margin  magenta Bow  x    Dup Top Margin  x alignment  Paper Source marks    Formatted Size       Bottom margin alignment marks    Repair information 4 5    5022 xxx    9  Adjust the screw to adjust the skew and straighten the image on the paper   If the top right alignment marks are lower than the top left alignment marks  rotate the alignment screw  counterclockwise a full revolution  and print the Quick Test page  Repeat adjusting the screw and printing  the Quick Test until the top alignment marks are the same distance from the top of the media   Note  One rotation of the printhead alignment screw equals approximately 0 5 millimeter movement of the  top edge print alignment marks     Straight Skewed       s o ed      n    10  When the top right and top left alignment marks are both showing and are even
239. umber for the Front door parts packet for the model you need on page 7 5     Removal procedures are for either the left or the right front door assembly restraint cables     Right restraint cable    1     PR    Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16    Release the cable spring  A  from the front door assembly    Remove the gearbox switch shield  B   See    Gearbox shield removal    on page 4 19    Remove the end of the cable  C  from the frame     Left restraint cable    1     Remove the front access cover assembly  See    Front access door cover assembly removal    on  page 4 16       Close the top access door     Release the cable spring  D  from the front door assembly   Note  In order to access the springs  make sure the top access cover is closed     Remove the end of the cable  E  from the frame     i                                                                     Installation note  The shortest cable installs on the right side of the printer        Repair information 4 59    5022 xxx    Fuser removal    See    Fuser assembly  115 V    on page 7 15     Fuser assembly  230 V    on page 7 15  or    Fuser assembly   100 V    on page 7 15 for the part number     CAUTION    The fuser can be extremely hot  Use care when handling to avoid burns        AN    Turn off the printer    Open the top access door    Rotate the fuser thumbscrews  A  counterclockwise until loosened   Grasp the handles  B   lift the fu
240. umn indicates that the part is procurable but is not pictured in the  illustration     Model information used in the parts catalog     Lexmark C534dn dtn Duplex  network  550 sheet tray        Parts catalog 7 1    5022 xxx    Covers    Assembly 1       7 2 Service Manual    Assembly 1  Covers    5022 xxx    Units    Units  Description  mach   FRU p    2  2  2  3  4  4  4  5  6  6  7  8  8  8  8  9    40X1415  40X1448  40X1449  40X1450  40X1414  40X3608  40X3585  40X3586  40X3582  40X3587  40X3588  40X3583  40X1451  40X1412  40X3604  40X3605  40X1422  40X3594  40X1427  40X3612  40X1425  40X1443  40X1413    40X3602  40X3581  40X1426  40X1440  40X3601    ee                A     A     A     MA     MA    A     A  ee ae ae       Se a A       A       A    A    M    Outer bezel  C52x   Inner bezel  C524 C524n C524dn   Inner bezel  C522n   Inner bezel  C520n   Operator panel assembly  C52x   Bezel  C530dn   Bezel  C532n   Bezel  C532dn   Operator panel assembly  C530dn C532n C532dn   Bezel  C534n   Bezel  C534dn   Operator panel assembly  C534n C534dn   Top access cover assembly  network   C520n C522n C524n C524dn  Top access cover assembly  non network   C524   Top access cover assembly  network   C532n C534n  Duplex top access assembly  network   C530dn C532dn C534dn  Exit tray cover  C52x   Exit tray cover  C53x   Rear cover   Paper tray dust cover with dust cover spring  C53x   Right cover   Front access door cover assembly  duplex   C524dn only    Front access door cover assembly
241. use the fine adjustment     6    8       T  Enter the number determined from the Fine Adjustment scale or the Coarse Adjustment scales on the part  of the page for the    T    value  The current value is automatically entered on the sheet  At this point  it should  be zero     Current New  Cyan Cyan  T value T value       8  Enter the    New Cyan T value    on the operator panel using the right and left arrows  and press Select to  save the value   9  Reprint the Quick Test  and evaluate whether you are at zero changes     4 10 Service Manual    5022 xxx    10  Repeat this process for skew  Z   Don t forget to add the T value and the current cyan Z value to obtain the  new skew  Z  value   An example is shown below     Current New Current New  Cyan Cyan Cyan Cyan  T value T value Z value Z value    STEP 1  Adjust the Top  T  margin and Skew  Z  then confirm before going to Step 2        Repair information 4 11    5022 xxx    11  Continue to follow the directions on the bottom of the first page to find the Cyan Top Margin  T   the Skew   Z   and on the second page of the Quick Test page  the Left Margin  L   Right Margin  R   and Bow  P      Left  L  Fine Adjustment    60       54 Left  L     Coarse    tH    42  36    L 0          Current  Cyan  L value    12     48 Adjustment    Cyan Alignment  Step 2    Bow  P  Coarse Adjustment    AERE     80  60  40  20 0 20 40 60 80    Bow  P  Fine Adjustment           20    N A 0O 0 i mi mi m   md  Onego    LN     I    New Current  Cyan 
242. uter bezel with the inner bezel  B  attached   For models C53x  Remove the bezel  The bezel is one piece for this set of models        Installation note  When reinstalling or replacing the outer bezel  insert the bottom of the bezel first  ensuring  that the outer bezel bottom portion fully seats        Repair information 4 21    5022 xxx    Operator panel inner bezel removal   models C52x only    See the part number for the inner bezel for the model you need on page 7 3     1  Remove the outer bezel  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Press the top of the inner bezel to release the inner bezel  A  from the outer bezel   3  Gently twist to free the lower tabs  B         4 22 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Operator panel assembly removal    See    Operator panel assembly  C52x    on page 7 3 for the part number  See the same page for the individual  part numbers for the C53x models     Warning  When replacing any one of the following components     e Operator panel assembly  e System card  e Smart chip card  C52x  or printhead assembly  C53x     Only replace one component at a time  Replace the required component  and perform a POR before  replacing a second component listed above  If this procedure is not followed  the printer will be  rendered inoperable     1  Remove the outer bezel  See    Operator panel outer bezel removal    on page 4 21   2  Remove the screw  A      5       A    3  Disengage the upper locking tabs  B    4  Disconnect the cable
243. val    See    Paper tray dust cover with dust cover spring  C53x    on page 7 3 for the part number     Unplug the power cord from the printer    Remove the exit tray  See    Exit tray cover removal    on page 4 15   Remove the paper tray    Place the printer on its back     eee YT    Remove the paper tray dust cover assembly     i   6    na   7  ee                  T               A B       C D    8  Set the dust cover bracket aside to reuse with the new FRU     4 24 Service Manual    Remove the four screws  A   The upper right screw can be accessed through a hole in the frame  B      5022 xxx    Rear cover removal    See    Rear cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     1  Loosen the eight screws  A    Note  Do not remove the screws     2  Lift up on the rear cover  and slide to the right to remove from the back of the printer        Repair information 4 25    5022 xxx    Right cover removal    See    Right cover    on page 7 3 for the part number     Make sure the power cord is removed    Place the printer on the table with the right side edge hanging over slightly   Open the top access door    Open the front access door    Remove the three screws  A      Se       B  6  Lift the bottom of the cover out  and slide the right cover down to remove the cover     4 26 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Installation note  Be sure the tab  B  is fully engaged        Repair information 4 27    5022 xxx    Top access cover assembly removal   model C52x only    See    Top access cover 
244. val    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     Replace the printhead card  See    Printhead Problem solved  Replace the system card     removal    on page 4 74  See    System card  Does the error clear  removal    on page 4 79        Diagnostic information 2 39    5022 xxx    920 06   POST  power on self test  error service check    Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card        Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear        920 07   POST  power on self test  error service check    Turn the printer off  and remove the rear cover    Replace the paper pick Go to step 2   Check the connector JTRAY1 for proper mechanism  See    Paper   connection to the system card  the cable for pick mechanism assembly   pinch points  and the cable or connector for removal    on page 4 68    any other damage     Is the cable damaged     Check the transparency sensor for correct Go to step 3  Remove the paper pick  mounting  mechanism  properly install  the transparency sensor   and reinstall the paper pick  mechanism  See    Paper  pick mechanism assembly  removal    on page 4 68     Is the transparency sensor properly mounted  in the paper pick mechanism     Replace the paper pick mechanism  See Problem solved  Replace the system card      Paper pick mechanism assembly removal    See    System card  on page 4 68  removal    on page 4 79     Does the error clear     Turn th
245. ved  Go to step 6   supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62   Does this fix the problem     Clean the printhead  Problem solved  Replace the printhead  See     Printhead removal    on    Does this fix the problem  page 4 74        Print quality   blank page    Is all the packing material for the Go to step 2  Remove the packing  photoconductor unit in question removed  material     Replace the photoconducior unit for the color Problem solved  Go to step 3   in question   Does this fix the problem     Enter the Diagnostics mode  turn off the Go to step 5  Replace the EP drive  printer  press and hold W and p  turn on the assembly  See   printer  and release the buttons when the clock    Electrophotographic  EP   graphic displays   and run the appropriate drive assembly removal     cartridge drive motor test for the missing color  model C52x only    on   See    General motor tests    on page 3 8  page 4 48 or     Electrophotographic  EP   drive assembly removal     model C53x only    on  page 4 51     Did the motor run        2 56 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Check the high voltage contact from the HVPS   Replace the transfer contact   Go to step 6   to the photoconductor charge roll  Ensure the assembly  See    Transfer  contact springs are properly mounted and that   contact assembly  the charge roll contact spring is making good removal    on page 4 92   contact with the HVPS spring that runs through  the left printer frame  See    Transfer contact  assembly removal    on pag
246. w voltage power supply  LVPS  removal    on page 4 65    Remove the system card  See    System card removal    on page 4 79    Remove the five mounting screws  A  from the outer left side of the printer    Note  Make a note of the attachment of the printhead ground cable  B  to the second screw from the  bottom for later installation     Remove the four screws  C  from the inner right side of the support shield   Pull the cables through the access holes on the right side of the printer       For network printers   Remove the two screws  D  attaching the parallel connector support plate     For non network printers   Remove the INA mounting plate screw  E  and the INA mounting plate     f    hian    2  7  bas  r             ag    Repair information 4 81    5022 xxx    9  Remove the four mounting screws  D  from the top and bottom of the support shield   Note  Only the printhead cables come through the access holes in the system card support shield        10  Lower and remove the support shield  Be careful not to damage the cables that route through the top frame  of the printer     4 82 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Toner level sensor removal    See    Toner level sensor    on page 7 11 for the part number     Note the locations of the toner sensors   Yellow       Cyan Magenta Black    1  Remove the HVPS  See    High voltage power supply  HVPS  removal    on page 4 62    2  For yellow and cyan only  Remove the transfer contact assembly  See    Transfer contact assembly  remova
247. when using non standard media sizes     J    Manual  Feed Slot    J       Media weight    O   w o o S    Primary tray and 500 sheet optional tray  16 to 47 Ib  60 to 177 g m      Letter  Legal  A4 Xerographic Long Grain  Short Grain 24 to 58 Ib  90 to 218 g m    Recycled Long Grain 20 to 471b  75 to 177 g m        Short Grain 28 to 58 Ib  105 to 218g m      Card Stock Cover 50  b 65 Ib     long and short   135 g m    176 g m      Index 67  b 90 Ib   120 g m    163 g m      Tag 74  b 100 Ib   120 g m    163 g m      Transparency   0 12 to 0 14 161 to 179 g m   mm  4 8 to 5 4 mil  A5  B5  JIS B5  Exec   Xerographic Long Grain 20 to 47 Ib  75 to 177 g m    Foli B  Seer ale enone Short Grain 24 to 58 Ib  90 to 218 g m    Multipurpose feeder and manual feed slot  Letter  Legal  A4 Xerographic Long Grain 20 to 47 Ib  75 to 177 g m   and Bonds   5  Short Grain 24 to 58 Ib  90 to 218 g m  Recycled Long Grain 20 to 47 Ib  75 to 177 g m   Short Grain 28 to 58 Ib  105 to 218 g m     Card Stock Cover 50 Ib  65 Ib   long short   135 g m    176 g m    Index 67  b  90 Ib   120 g m    163 g m      Tag 74  b  100 Ib   120 g m   163 g m      Labels  max  Paper 35 Ib  131 g m    Vinyl Not Supported    Letter  Legal  A4 Transparency Thickness  0 12   161 to 179 g m    continued  to 0 13 mm    General information 1 11        SS         SNr       5022 xxx    Media weight  O e o o     o Y  A5  B5  JIS B5  Exec   Xerographic 20 to 47 Ib  75 to 177 g m    Envelope 16 to 28 Ib  60 to 105 g m    C5  C6
248. y from the transfer contact assembly during removal     a ade ea    Installation note  For ease of installation  put the transfer contact assembly on before installing the springs     5       4 92 Service Manual    5022 xxx    Waste toner assembly removal    Not a FRU     1  Press release latch  A    2  Swing front of waste toner away from printer and remove        Repair information 4 93    5022 xxx    4 94 Service Manual    5022 xxx    4  Repair information    Removal and cleaning precautions    AN Observe the following precautions whenever you service the printer     Be sure to unplug the printer from the outlet before attempting to service the printer    To reassemble the printer  reverse the order of removal unless otherwise specified    Do not operate the printer anytime during removals  If it is absolutely necessary to run the printer with its  covers removed  use care not to allow your clothing to be caught in revolving parts such as the gears   rollers and fan motor    Never touch the terminals of electrical parts or high voltage parts such as the high voltage power supply   After part replacement  ensure the wiring harness is not caught or damaged    Do not attempt to cut or extend the wiring harness    Confirm the wiring harness connector is connected properly    Be sure to handle the fuser carefully as it remains hot for a while after the printer stops running  Always  unplug connectors by holding the connector housing     Warning  Read the following before handli
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
経営学第50巻第2・3号 03 八重樫文・岩谷昌樹.indd  (IQ1201)取扱説明書[第1版]  雑排 NPBW 施工説明書  Septembre 2015  Samsung MAX-KC650 Инструкция по использованию  Apex MJ-16 computer case  E6590179  iMC-M iMC-MP Bedienungsanleitung  CDA FWC152    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file